2005 cadillac sts owner manual m - vaden gmpp · 2005 cadillac sts owner manual m. general motors,...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-6Safety Belts .............................................. 1-7Child Restraints ....................................... 1-26Airbag System ......................................... 1-45Restraint System Check ............................ 1-56

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-11Windows ................................................. 2-16Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-20Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-23Mirrors .................................................... 2-35OnStar® System ...................................... 2-39HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-41Storage Areas ......................................... 2-45Sunroof .................................................. 2-46Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-47

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-47Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-56Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-69Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-87

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-36

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-44Rear Axle ............................................... 5-45Front Axle ............................................... 5-46Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-47Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-50Tires ...................................................... 5-51Appearance Care ..................................... 5-82Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-91Electrical System ...................................... 5-92Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-104

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index ................................................................ 1

2005 Cadillac STS Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name STS areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the timeit was printed. We reserve the right to make changes inthe product after that time without notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor CarDivision whenever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 05STS A First Edition

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 05/27/04All Rights Reserved

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle. If thisis done, it can help you learn about the featuresand controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words worktogether in the owner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Weuse a box and the word CAUTION to tell about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific nameof a component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-2Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-3Heated and Ventilated Seats ............................1-4Power Reclining Seatback ...............................1-5Head Restraints .............................................1-6

Rear Seats .......................................................1-6Heated Seats .................................................1-6Rear Seat Pass-Through Door .........................1-7

Safety Belts .....................................................1-7Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-12How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-13Driver Position ..............................................1-13Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-19Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-20Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-20Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-20Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults .......................................1-23Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-25Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-25

Child Restraints .............................................1-26Older Children ..............................................1-26

Infants and Young Children ............................1-29Child Restraint Systems .................................1-32Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-35Top Strap ....................................................1-36Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-38Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ....................................1-40Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ............................................1-40Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ....................................1-42Airbag System ...............................................1-45

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-47When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-51What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-53How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-53What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-54Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-56

Restraint System Check ..................................1-56Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-56Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-57

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front SeatsPower Seats

The power seat controlsare located on theoutboard sides of thefront seat cushions.

• Move the front of the horizontal control up or downto adjust the front portion of the cushion.

• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or downto adjust the rear portion of the cushion.

• Slide the horizontal control forward or rearward tomove the entire seat forward or rearward.

• Press the vertical control rearward to recline theseatback. Press the vertical control forward toraise the seatback. See Power Reclining Seatbackon page 1-5.

If your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for seat positions.See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel onpage 2-64.

1-2

Power LumbarThe driver’s andpassenger’s seatbacklumbar support switchesare located on theoutboard sides ofthe seats.

Use the power seat controls first to get the properposition, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.

Use the top lumbar switch to adjust support to themiddle seatback and the bottom lumbar switch to adjustsupport to the lower seatback. Press the front of theswitch to increase support and the rear of the switch todecrease support.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position of yourlumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may haveheated front seats.The buttons arelocated on the climatecontrol panel.

z(Heated Seat and Seatback): This button is for theheated seat and seatback. Press the up arrow onceto turn on the heated seat at the highest setting.Press the down arrow once to turn on the heated seatat the lowest setting.

Pressing the up or down arrows a second time will raiseor lower the setting. To turn off the heated seat keeppressing the down arrow until the indicator for heatedseat on the climate control display is off.

The heated seat will automatically shut off when thevehicle is turned off.

1-3

Heated and Ventilated Seats

Your vehicle may haveheated and ventilated frontseats. The buttons arelocated on the climatecontrol panel.

z(Heated Seat and Seatback): This button is forthe heated seat and seatback.

{(Ventilated Seat): This button is for theventilated seat.

There are three settings for each feature. A light bar inthe climate control display shows the setting; high,medium or low. The longest bar shows the high rangeand the shortest bar shows the low range.

Pressing either the heated seat or ventilated seatbutton will start that feature at the highest setting.Each time you press the button, the feature willdecrease one setting.

To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button untilthe display lights turn off.

The heated or ventilated seats will automatically shut offwhen the vehicle is turned off.

1-4

Power Reclining SeatbackThe vertical power seat control described earlier allowsthe seatback to recline. See Power Seats on page 1-2for more information.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can not do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can not do its job. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt can not do its job either. In acrash the belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safetybelt properly.

1-5

Head Restraints

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The head restraints lock into place when raised.To release the head restraint and lower it, press the tablocated at the base of the restraint. The head restraintstilt forward and rearward, also.

The rear seat head restraints work the same as thefront head restraints.

Rear SeatsHeated Seats

Your vehicle may have this feature. The buttons used tocontrol the heated rear seats are located on the backof the center console. The engine must be runningfor the heated seat feature to work.

1-6

z(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button toturn the heated seat feature on. When you pressthe button, the feature will turn on at the highest setting.Each time you press the button, the feature will godown one temperature setting. A light next to the buttonwill indicate the setting; 3 is the highest, 1 is the lowest.To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button untilthe indicator light goes off.

The heated rear seats will shut off automatically whenthe ignition is turned off.

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorYour vehicle has a pass-through door that providesaccess to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 2-13.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she can notwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

1-7

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-58.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling updoes matter... a lot!

1-8

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

Put someone on it.

1-9

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-10

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-11

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accidentif I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you are upside down. And your chance ofbeing conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and willbe in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every airbagsystem ever offered for sale has required the use ofsafety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that hasairbags, you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in anaccident — even one that is not your fault — youand your passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-12

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are different rules forsmaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in yourvehicle, see Older Children on page 1-26 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-29. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-25.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-13

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

6. This safety belt has a feature that will reduce thetension of the safety belt on the occupant’sshoulder. To set this feature, gently pull on the belt,or lean forward and then sit back. The belt willretract and rest lightly against the occupant.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-14

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-15


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at thepelvic bones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-16


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-17


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-18

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The tension reducer will release and the belt shouldgo back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, push therelease button (A) andmove the height adjusterto the desired position.You can move the adjusterup just by pushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.After you move the adjusterto where you want it, try tomove it down withoutpushing the release buttonto make sure it has lockedinto position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on your shoulder. The belt should beaway from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder.

1-19

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely thatthe fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective iswearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-13.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt — except for onething. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. If this happens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people inthe rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-20

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 1-25.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-21

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-22

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsRear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passenger positionin the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints andbooster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guidesmay be installed on the shoulder belts. Here is howto install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

1-23

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

1-24

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-20.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn theguide and clip inward and in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. They are onthe buckle end of the safety belts for the driver and rightfront passenger. They help the safety belts reduce aperson’s forward movement in a moderate to severefrontal and near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-57.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer willorder you an extender. It is free. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, and useit only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender hasbeen designed for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

1-25

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lapbelt should fit snugly below the hips, just touchingthe top of the thighs. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-26

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can not properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.If the child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body would havethe restraint that belts provide.

1-27

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This appliesbelt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-28

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone to use safety restraints. Infact, the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to someage must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby does notweigh much — until a crash. During a crash ababy will become so heavy it is not possible tohold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-29

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, heightand age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborn infant’sneck is weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles intothe restraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders.Infants always should be secured inappropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body areathat is unprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious or fatalinjuries. Young children always should besecured in appropriate child restraints.

1-31

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of the infant.The harness system holds the infant in place and,in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

1-32

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,and some high-back booster seats have a five-pointharness. A booster seat can also help a child to seeout the window.

1-33

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, which ispurchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reducethe chance of injury, the child also has to be securedwithin the restraint. The vehicle’s belt systemsecures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, andthe add-on child restraint’s harness system holds thechild in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps thatcome down over each of the infant’s shoulders andbuckle together at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and acrotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low against thechild’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it willhave a label saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system orthe LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within the restraint to help reduce thechance of personal injury. When securing an add-onchild restraint, refer to the instructions that come with therestraint which may be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

1-34

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We, therefore, recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in arear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the frontpassenger seat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint ina rear seat.

CAUTION: (Continued)


If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as it willgo. It is better to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

1-35

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchoredto the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strapbeing anchored. Others require the top strap always tobe anchored. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint. If yours requires thatthe top strap be anchored, do not use the restraintunless it is anchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child

restraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchorpoints. Be sure to use an anchor point located on thesame side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

1-36

If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the topstrap under it.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

Top Strap Anchor LocationYour vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seatingpositions. You will find the anchors behind the rearseat on the filler panel.In order to get to each bracket, you will have to openthe trim cover. When using a top strap-equippedchild restraint in a rear outboard position, be sure toroute the top strap under the head restraint.

Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in theright front passenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top strap be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint say thatthe top strap must be anchored. There is no placeto anchor the top strap in this position.

1-37

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will findanchors in all three rear seating positions.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Some restraintsalso use another vehicle anchor to secure a toptether strap.

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower AnchorageC. Top Tether

1-38

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for thischild restraint system, each seating position with theLATCH system has a label on the seatback at eachlower anchor position.

The labels are locatednear the base of all threerear seating positions.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

1-39

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seatingposition you want to use, where the bottom of theseatback meets the back of the seat cushion.See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-38.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on thechild restraint to the LATCH anchorages in thevehicle. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-36.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook thetop tether from the top tether anchorage andthen disconnect the LATCH attachments from theLATCH anchorages.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-38. See Top Strapon page 1-36 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-40

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-41

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find ithelpful to use your knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-38. See Top Strapon page 1-36 if your child restraint has one.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint ina rear seat.

A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint.

1-42

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’sair bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See Power Seats on page 1-2.


3. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-43

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. You may find ithelpful to use your knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

1-44

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has six airbags:• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal

airbag for the right front passenger,• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver

and another for the right front passenger,• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver

and passenger directly behind the driver, and• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front

passenger and the person seated directly behindthat passenger.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating airbag. But theseairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job andcomply with federal regulations.Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt



during a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designed towork with safety belts but do not replace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,or in many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, frontal airbags mayprovide less protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided in the past.The seat-mounted side impact airbags androof-mounted side impact airbags are designedto inflate only in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of your vehicle.They are not designed to inflate in frontal,in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone inyour vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

1-45

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,as you would be if you were leaning forward,it could seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for airbag inflation beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Occupantsshould not lean on or sleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see Older Children on page 1-26 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-29.

1-46

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-59for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

1-47

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The driver’s seat-mounted side impact airbag is in theside of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-48

The right front passenger’s seat-mounted side impactairbag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closestto the door.

The side impact airbag for the driver and the personseated directly behind the driver is in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

1-49

The side impact airbag for the right front passenger andthe person seated directly behind that passenger is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering. And, because your vehiclehas side impact airbags, never secure anythingto the roof of your vehicle by routing the ropeor tiedown through any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear.

1-50

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear.Do not put anything between an occupant andan airbag, and do not attach or put anythingon the steering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seat coversblock the inflation path of a side impact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact exceeds a predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholds take into accounta variety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbagswill or should deploy is not based on how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontalsensor, which helps the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, theseairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

1-51

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold level forthe reduced deployment is about 11 to 15 mph(18 to 24 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 20 to 24 mph (32 to 38.5 km/h).(The threshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.)

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagcould inflate at a different crash speed than ifthe object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at adifferent crash speed than if the object does notdeform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not likely help the occupants.

The side impact airbags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbagwill inflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would notlikely help the occupant. A side impact airbag willonly deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For sideimpact airbags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

1-52

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For bothfrontal and side impact airbags, the sensing systemtriggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflatesthe airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside the steeringwheel, instrument panel, the side of the front seatbacksclosest to the door and the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection

provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal airbags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, including frontalor near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severeside collisions for the side impact airbags.

1-53

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize the airbag inflated.Some components of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatbackclosest to the door for the seat-mounted side impactairbags and the area along the ceiling of your vehiclenear the side windows — will be hot for a short time.The parts of the bag that come into contact with you maybe warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be somesmoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver fromseeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stoppeople from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan not get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when theairbags inflate (if battery power is available). You canlock the doors again and turn the interior lamps offby using the door lock and interior lamp controls.The hazard warning flashers will also come on when theairbags deploy. If you want to turn them off, press thehazard warning flasher button twice.

1-54

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur fromthe right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts foryour airbag system. If you do not get them,the airbag system will not be there to help protectyou in another crash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly other parts.The service manual for your vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records information aftera crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders on page 7-9.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that anairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer for service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbagcovering on the driver’s and right front passenger’sseatback, or the side impact airbag covering onthe ceiling near the side windows, the bag maynot work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, both theairbag module and the instrument panel for the rightfront passenger’s airbag, the airbag module andseatback for the driver’s and right front passenger’sseat-mounted side impact airbags, or side impactairbag module and ceiling covering for theroof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings.

1-55

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicing your vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are too close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrappedwith yellow tape, yellow coverings or yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag systems. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-56

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraint systemmay not properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew buckle assembly will be there to help protect youin a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driver andfront passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even ifthe frontal airbags have not deployed. The driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckle assembliescontain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safetybelt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has beenin a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle or while you are driving.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-59.

1-57

✍ NOTES

1-58

Keys ...............................................................2-2Keyless Access System ...................................2-3Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-4

Doors and Locks ............................................2-11Door Locks ..................................................2-11Power Door Locks ........................................2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-12Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-13Trunk ..........................................................2-13

Windows ........................................................2-16Power Windows ............................................2-17Sun Visors ...................................................2-19

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-20Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-20Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-22

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-23New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-23Ignition Positions ..........................................2-23Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-24Starting Your Engine .....................................2-24Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26All-Wheel Drive ............................................2-29Parking Brake ..............................................2-30Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-31

Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-32Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-34

Mirrors ...........................................................2-35Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® ............................................2-35Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-35Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-37Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-38Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-38Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror ..................2-39

OnStar ® System .............................................2-39HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-41

Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-42Storage Areas ................................................2-45

Glove Box ...................................................2-45Cupholder(s) ................................................2-45Center Console Storage Area .........................2-45Convenience Net ..........................................2-45

Sunroof .........................................................2-46Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-47

Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .......2-64

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle isdangerous, but it is even more dangerous ifthe keyless access transmitter is also left inthe vehicle. A child or others could be badlyinjured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.

Do not leave the keyless access transmitter ina vehicle with children.

2-2

There is one key for thedriver’s door, glove boxand rear seat pass-throughdoor. See “Rear SeatPass-Through Door” underTrunk on page 2-13 formore information.

Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System withpushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23Ignition Positions for information on starting the vehicle.

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of featuresthat can help prevent theft. You can have a lot oftrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever loseyour transmitters and/or key. You may even have todamage your vehicle to get in. So be sure youhave a spare transmitter and/or key.

In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Service on page 7-6 Roadside Service.

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock yourvehicle if needed. If the vehicle battery is dead,OnStar® will be unable to unlock the vehicle. SeeOnStar® System on page 2-39 for more information.

Keyless Access SystemYour vehicle has a Keyless Access system that operateson a radio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

2-3

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If you ever notice a decrease in the remote keylessentry transmitter range, try doing one of the following:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underKeyless Access System Operation on page 2-4.

• Check to make sure that an electronic device suchas a cellular phone or lap top computer is notcausing interference.

• If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Keyless Access System OperationYour vehicle has a Keyless Access System thatallows you to lock and unlock your doors, open yourtrunk lid, remotely start the engine and locate yourvehicle or sound your vehicle’s alarm from a distance asmuch as much as 30 feet (10 m) away.

The Keyless Access System also allows you to lock andunlock your doors and access your trunk withoutremoving your remote transmitter from your pocket,purse, briefcase, etc. The system operates whenthe transmitter is located within 3 feet (1 m) of the dooror trunk of your vehicle. See “Keyless Doors Unlock”and “Keyless Ft (Front) Door Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

Your vehicle comes withtwo transmitters.

2-4

Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors. Thelock status light on the front doors will turn on forfive seconds and the turn signal indicators will flash. Ifthis button is pressed twice, the doors will lock, thestatus light on the door will turn on for five seconds, theturn signal indicators will flash twice and the horn willsound once. Press and hold the lock button formore than two seconds to close any open window(s) onyour vehicle. If any window is unable to closecompletely, it will reverse and the horn will chirp. See“Anti-Pinch Feature” under Power Windows onpage 2-17 for more information.

You can program your vehicle so the turn signalindicators will not flash and the horn will not soundwhen pressing the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. For more information see “Lights Flashat Lock” and “Horn Chirps at Lock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

/ (Remote Start): Pressing this button operates theremote start feature. See “Remote Vehicle Start” atthe end of this section for more detailed information.

K (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock thedriver’s door. The turn signal indicators will flash twice.Press the unlock button twice within five seconds tounlock all the doors. If it is dark enough outside, yourinterior lamps will come on.

You can program your vehicle so the turn signalindicators will not flash and the fog lamps and reverselamps remain on steady for approximately 20 secondswhen the keyless access transmitter is used tounlock the vehicle. See “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Ext.(Exterior) Lights at Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

If your vehicle has the memory feature you can programand recall memory settings when you press the unlockbutton on the keyless access transmitter. See MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-64 formore information.

G (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunkwhile the engine is turned off or the shift lever isin PARK (P).

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and releasethis button to locate your vehicle. The horn will chirpthree times and the turn signal lamps will flashthree times. Press and hold the button for three secondsto sound the panic alarm. The horn will chirp and theturn signal lamps will flash for 30 seconds. Pressand release the button again to cancel the panic alarm.

2-5

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach Keyless Access system is coded to allow onlytransmitters programmed to your vehicle to work.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed through your GMdealer. Your GM dealer can reprogram your vehicle solost or stolen transmitters no longer work with yourvehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when youhave a recognized transmitter, do the following.Two recognized transmitters are required forCanadian owners.

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.

3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinderlocated on the outside of the driver’s door.

4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times withinfive seconds.

5. The DIC will display READY FOR FOB #X, whereX can be 2, 3 or 4.

6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into thetransmitter pocket with the transmitter buttonsfacing the front of the vehicle. The transmitterpocket is inside the console bin located betweenthe driver and front passenger seat.

7. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep willsound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.

8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocketand press the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter two times.

2-6

The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadianowners to see their GM dealer for matching newtransmitters when a recognized transmitter is notavailable. United States Owners are permitted to matcha new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognizedtransmitter is not available. the procedure will requirethree ten minute cycles to complete the matchingprocess. Do the following:

1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into thetransmitter pocket with the transmitter buttonsfacing the front of the vehicle. The transmitterpocket is inside the console bin located betweenthe driver and front passenger seat.

3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinderlocated on the driver’s door.

4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times withinfive seconds.

5. The DIC message will display OFF-ACCESSORYTO LEARN.

6. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch).7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will

count down to zero, one minute at a time.8. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TO

LEARN again.9. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch).

10. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and willcount down to zero, one minute at a time.

11. The DIC will display OFF-ACCESSORY TOLEARN again.

12. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch).13. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will

count down to zero, one minute at a time.14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY

FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously knowntransmitters have been erased.

15. Once the transmitter is recognized andprogrammed, a beep will sound and the DIC willdisplay READY FOR FOB #2.

16. Remove the keyless access transmitter and pressthe unlock button twice to initialize it.

2-7

If you have additional transmitters to program, thisprocess can be repeated until four transmitters havebeen programmed. The DIC will then display MAX# FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode.

When you are done programming transmitters, pressthe unlock button on each keyless access transmittertwice. After performing this process, transmitterspreviously programmed will no longer work with yourvehicle and must be reprogrammed.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your keyless accesstransmitter should last about three years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will notwork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it is probably time to change the battery. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) may display KEY FOBBATTERY LOW.

A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NOFOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.If this happens, place the transmitter in the console bintransmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the frontof the vehicle. Then, with the vehicle in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N), press the brake pedal and the startbutton. See Starting Your Engine on page 2-24, foradditional information about your vehicle’s electronic

keyless ignition with push button start. Although this willstart the vehicle, it is recommended that you replacethe transmitter battery as soon as possible.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on theback of the transmitter and gently pry apart thefront and back.

2. Gently pull the battery out of the transmitter.

2-8

3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)side down. Use a battery type CR2032 orequivalent.

4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put ittogether so water will not get in.

5. Test the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start the engine from outsidethe vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): To start the vehicle using theremote start feature, do the following:

1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter atthe vehicle.

2. Press the transmitter’s lock button, release it andthen immediately press and hold the transmitter’sremote start button for at least two seconds or untilthe vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’sdoors will be locked.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turnon and remain on while the vehicle is running.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 while the engine is stillrunning to add 10 minutes of engine running.

If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut offafter 10 minutes unless a time extension has beendone. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following:

• Aim the Keyless Access transmitter at the vehicleand press the remote start button until the parkinglamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Press the OFF/ACC button on the ignition switch.See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.

• Turn on the valet lockout switch. See Valet LockoutSwitch on page 2-22

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,depress the brake pedal and press the start button onthe keyless ignition switch to transition from remote startoperation to normal vehicle operation.

Before the remote vehicle start system can be operatedwith the keyless access transmitter it must beactivated. The remote start system is turned on throughthe vehicle personalization system.

You can also program the remote vehicle start systemto start up the vehicle’s automatic climate controlsystem. If this feature is turned on, the system monitorsthe outside temperature and turns on the rear windowdefogger, front window defogger, and heated orventilated seats (if equipped). See “Personal SettingsMenu” under Vehicle Personalization on page 2-47.

2-9

Laws in some local communities may restrict the use ofremote starters, for example, requiring a personusing remote start to have the vehicle in view whendoing so. Check local regulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is lowon fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separate starts,each with 10 minutes of engine running. If you press theremote start button on the keyless access transmitteragain before the first 10 minutes of engine running timehas expired, 10 minutes is added to the remainingminutes. For example, if the remote start buttonis pressed again after five minutes of the engine runtime, 10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutesof the engine running. Once two remote starts or 20minutes of the engine running have been provided, thevehicle must be started using the Keyless Accesswith Pushbutton Start feature, if the engine needs to berestarted. See Starting Your Engine on page 2-24 formore information regarding the keyless ignition.

The remote start feature will not operate if:

• The check engine light is displayed.

• The valet lockout switch is pressed to on.

• The Keyless Access transmitter is in the vehicle.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled.

• An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theftwas attempted.

Your Keyless Access transmitter, with the remote startbutton, provides an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicle isrunning. As a result, you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see Keyless AccessSystem on page 2-3.

2-10

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, press the lock or unlock button onthe keyless access transmitter. When you haveyour transmitter with you, you may also unlock andopen the door by pulling the door handle. You do nothave to press the unlock button on the transmitter. Entryoccurs when the door handle is pulled and the vehiclerecognizes your transmitter. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 2-47 for information on how to program thekeyless access feature.

From the inside, use the power door lock switcheslocated on each front door. See Power Door Locks onpage 2-11 for more information. The rear passengerdoors have manual door lock knobs located at the top ofthe door panel near the window. Push down the knobto lock the door. Pull up the knob to unlock the door.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thefront doors.

K (Unlock): Press this part of the switch to unlockthe doors.

Q (Lock): Press this part of the switch to lockthe doors.

2-11

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle was programmed from the factory so thatwhen the doors are closed, the ignition is on andthe shift lever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doorswill lock.

The front doors can still be opened from the inside whilethe doors are locked. If a rear passenger needs toexit the vehicle, have that person use the manual knobor use the power door lock switch on either frontdoor. When the door is closed again, it will not lockautomatically. Use the manual knob or the power doorlock switch to lock the door.

The doors were also programmed from the factory tounlock every time the shift lever is moved back intoPARK (P).

The power door locks can be programmed through theradio display. The radio display allows you to choosevarious lock and unlock settings. For more informationon programming, see Vehicle Personalization onpage 2-47.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle is equipped with rear door security locksthat prevent passengers from opening the rear doors onyour vehicle from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. You mustopen the rear doors toaccess them.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear doorsecurity lock label and turn it to engage the lock.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened fromthe inside when this feature is in use.

2-12

When you want to open a rear door when the securitylock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the front door power lock switch orby lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert your key into the slot next to the reardoor security lock label and turn it to disengagethe lock.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

The rear door locks will now work normally.

Lockout ProtectionYour vehicle can be programmed to sound the hornthree times and unlock the driver’s door when bothdoors are closed and there is a keyless accesstransmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. When thedriver’s door is reopened, the key in reminder chime willsound continuously. The vehicle will remain lockedonly when at least one transmitter has been removedfrom the vehicle and both doors are closed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You cannot see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.

2-13

Trunk Lid ReleaseThere are several ways to release the trunk lid.

• V (Trunk Lid Release): Press this button locatedon the driver’s door. The vehicle must be inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet modeturned off. To disable valet mode, see Valet LockoutSwitch on page 2-22.

• Press the trunk lid release button on the keylessaccess transmitter. See Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 2-4. The vehicle must bein PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet modeturned off.

• Squeeze the trunk release button located on therear of the trunk lid above the license plate, aslong as you have your keyless access transmitterwith you. Entry occurs when the button is beingpressed and the vehicle recognizes the transmitter.The vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the valetmode turned off.

If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can stillaccess the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seatpass-through door and pulling the emergency trunkrelease handle.

2-14

Rear Seat Pass-Through DoorThis feature allows you to access the trunk withoutopening the trunk lid.

To open the door, do the following:

1. Pull down the rear seat armrest.

2. If it is locked, insert and turn the keycounterclockwise in the lock on the door.

3. Press the button above the lock.

4. Lower the door.

To open the trunk lid, pull down the emergency trunkrelease handle located in the trunk. See “EmergencyTrunk Release Handle” following.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk may damage it. Use theemergency trunk release handle only to help youopen the trunk lid.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle locatedinside the trunk near the back of the rear seats. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light. Pulldown the release handle to open the trunk from theinside of the vehicle.

2-15

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-16

Power Windows

The power window switches are located on the armrestnear each window. Press the front of the switch tothe first position to open the window to the desired level.Lift up the front of the switch to the first position toclose the window.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) thatallows you to use the power windows once the enginehas been turned off. For more information, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows. It allows you to lowerthe window all the way without continuously pressingthe switch.

Press the front of the switch to the second position andrelease. If you want to stop the window as it islowering, briefly pull up the switch.

Express-Up WindowThis feature is on all windows. It allows you to raise thewindow all the way without continuously lifting theswitch. Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate theexpress-up feature. If you want to stop the windowas it is raising, briefly press the switch.

2-17

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected or is not working, you will need toreprogram each window for the express-up featureto work.

To program each window, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC or ON, or while RAP isactive, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the power window switch until thewindow has fully opened.

3. Continue holding the switch for approximatelytwo seconds.

4. Pull up the power window switch until the window isfully closed.

The window is now programmed. Repeat the processfor all windows.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf any object is in the path of the window when theexpress-up is active, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.Weather conditions such as severe icing may alsocause the window to auto-reverse. The windowwill return to normal operation once the obstruction orcondition is removed.

{CAUTION:

If express override is activated, the windowwill not reverse automatically. You or otherscould be injured and the window could bedamaged. Before you use express override,make sure that all people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

2-18

Express Window OverrideA condition may exist that causes auto-reversal of thewindow due to weather or an obstruction. In anemergency, the anti-pinch feature can be overridden ina supervised mode. Hold the window switch all theway down in the express position. The window will risefor as long as the switch is held. Once the switch isreleased, the express mode is re-activated.

In this mode, the window can still close on an object inits path. Use care when using the override mode.

Window LockoutThe rear window lockout button is located on thedriver’s door armrest near the window switches. Pressthis button to disable the rear window controls. The lighton the button will illuminate, indicating that the featureis in use. The rear windows can be raised or loweredusing the driver’s window switches when the lockoutfeature is on. To restore power to the rear windows,press the button again. The light on the button willgo out.

The front passenger window can be programmed to bedisabled using the window lockout button. SeeVehicle Personalization on page 2-47.

Secure Car FeatureThe windows can be closed by pressing the lock buttonon the keyless access transmitter. See KeylessAccess System Operation on page 2-4 for moreinformation. The windows, if down, will express-up. Ifany window was unable to completely close, it willreverse and the horn will chirp. See “Anti-PinchFeature” previously.

Sun VisorsSwing down the visor or detach it from the centermount and move to the side to block out glare. Thevisors also have side-to-side slide capability forgreater coverage.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsPull the visor down and lift the cover. Move the slideswitch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.

2-19

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Theft-Deterrent SystemYour vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light islocated on the instrumentpanel cluster.

If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security lightwill flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrentsystem.

To arm the system, do one of the following:

• Press the lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. If the door is closed when the lockbutton is pressed, the security light will stayilluminated for 30 seconds. After the securitylight goes off, the theft-deterrent system is armed.Pressing the lock button twice will arm thesystem immediately.

• Open the door. Lock the door with the power doorlock switch or lock button on the keyless accesstransmitter. The security light should flash. Close thedoor. The security light will stop flashing and stayon. After 30 seconds the light should turn off,the theft-deterrent system is armed.

• Passive Arming, if activated through the vehiclepersonalization feature, will arm the systemautomatically after you close the door and take atleast one keyless access transmitter with you.The security light will turn on. After 60 seconds thelight should turn off. The theft-deterrent systemis armed. See Vehicle Personalization onpage 2-47.

If a door, hood or the trunk is opened without thekeyless access transmitter, the horn will sound for30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes.The vehicle cannot be started without a keylessaccess transmitter.

2-20

The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:

• The key is used to lock the driver’s door.

• The driver’s door is locked using the power doorlock switch after the doors are closed.

If the vehicle is locked using the keyless accesstransmitter and a door, trunk lid or hood is open or notclosed completely, the security light will flash for 60seconds and then go off. At this time the theft-deterrentsystem will be armed but door, trunk lid or hood thatwas open or not completely closed will not triggeran alarm event. The door, trunk lid or hood that wascompletely closed will still be armed and will trigger atheft event if they are opened or tampered with.

The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlockthe doors when you approach the vehicle and thekeyless access transmitter is with you. See VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

Pressing the unlock button on the keyless accesstransmitter or using the key to unlock the driver’s doordisarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a doorany other way while the system is armed will activatethe alarm.

Testing the Alarm1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then

get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.

2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,lock the vehicle using the power door lock switchor the Keyless Access transmitter and closethe door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until thesecurity light goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using the power doorlock switch and open the door. The horn will soundand the exterior lamps will flash.

You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlockbutton on the keyless access transmitter or by startingthe car.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. Toreplace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-93. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, youmay need to have your vehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm theTheft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

2-21

Valet Lockout Switch

The valet lockout switchis located inside theglove box.

9 (Off): Press the left side of the valet lockout switchto turn the lockout feature off. When the lockoutfeature is off, you can open the trunk using either thekeyless access transmitter or the trunk releasebutton located on the driver’s door.

R (On): Press the right side of the valet lockout switchto turn the lockout feature on. When the lockoutfeature is turned on, the trunk cannot be unlocked withthe keyless access transmitter or the trunk releasebutton located on the driver’s door. If the valet lockoutfeature is on it will also disable the remote startfeature and the HomeLink® transmitter, if equipped.

Locking the glove box with your key will also helpto secure your vehicle.

See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-4 andTrunk on page 2-13 for additional information.

2-22

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast orslow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline every time you get newbrake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.

Ignition Positions

Your vehicle has anelectronic keyless ignitionwith pushbutton start.

/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on thebrake to start the engine. The shifter must be inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the engine and thekeyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe ignition to work.

9 ACC (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine is onor in accessory mode, press this button to turn theengine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24 for moreinformation. The shifter must be in PARK (P) for theengine to turn off.

2-23

When the engine is off, press this button to place thevehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY ACTIVE willdisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This modeallows you to use things like the radio and the windshieldwipers while the engine is off. Use accessory mode if youmust have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off,for example, if your vehicle is being pushed or towed. Ifthe door is open while in accessory mode, the key inreminder chime will sound continuously.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The following accessories on your vehicle may be usedfor up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Radio

• Power Windows

• Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or ifone of the front doors is opened. If you want powerfor another 10 minutes, close all the doors and press theOFF/ACCESSORY button to place the vehicle inaccessory mode. Press the button again and the vehiclewill return to RAP.

Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position — that isa safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehiclefor the ignition to work.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press theSTART button. If no keyless access transmitteris present, the DIC will display NO FOBDETECTED. When the engine begins cranking, letgo of the button. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.If the battery in the keyless access transmitter isweak, the DIC will display FOB BATTERYLOW. You can still drive the vehicle. See “BatteryReplacement” under Keyless Access SystemOperation on page 2-4 for more information.

2-24

Notice: Holding the button in for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause the vehicle’s batteryto be drained much sooner. This can also causedamage to the starter motor. Wait 15 secondsbetween each try to avoid draining your vehicle’sbattery or damaging the starter.

2. If the engine does not start and no DIC message isdisplayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly.

Stopping Your EngineMove the shift lever to PARK (P) and press theOFF/ACCESSORY button. If the shifter is not inPARK (P), the vehicle will go into accessory mode andthe DIC will display SHIFT TO PARK. Once theshifter is moved to PARK (P), the vehicle will turn off.

If the keyless access transmitter is not detectedwhile going to off, the DIC will display NO FOB – OFFOR RUN?.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may be equipped with an enginecoolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You will get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. Thecord is located in the engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle near the engine oildipstick. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.You must remove the plastic cap to accessthe plug.

2-25

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not, it couldbe damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advicefor that particular area.

Automatic Transmission OperationThe shift lever is located on the center console betweenthe front seats.

There are several differentpositions for the shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is thebest position to use when you start the enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

2-26

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-31. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-38.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before startingthe engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmissionshift lock control system. You must fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition is on. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) while pressing the button onthe shift lever as you maintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into the gear you wish. See ShiftingOut of Park (P) on page 2-32.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission.See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-30 for additional information.

2-27

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can alsouse NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving. If you need more power for passing, andyou are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.The transmission will shift down to a lower gearand have more power.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

FOURTH (4): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it offers more power and lower fueleconomy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).

Here are examples for using FOURTH (4) instead ofAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.

• When going down a steep hill.

This position may also offer improved trailer towingperformance in certain driving conditions.

2-28

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high rpmswithout upshifting while using Driver ShiftControl (DSC), you could damage your vehicle.Always upshift when necessary while using DSC.

Your automatic transmission has a Driver ShiftControl (DSC) feature that allows you to change gearssimilar to a manual transmission. To use theDSC feature:

1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area. TheDIC will display which mode the transmission isin. See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 3-69.If you do not move the shift lever forward orrearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. Whiledriving in sport mode, the transmission may remainin a gear longer than it would in normal drivingmode based on braking, throttle input and vehiclelateral acceleration.

2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearwardto downshift.

The odometer on the instrument panel cluster willchange to show the requested gear range when movingthe shift lever forward or rearward.

While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmershifting and increased performance. You can use thisfor sport driving or when climbing hills to stay ingear longer or to down shift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allow you to shift into gearsappropriate for the vehicle speed and rpm. Thetransmission will not automatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the engine rpm is too high.

All-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle is equipped with this feature, enginepower is sent to all four wheels all the time.

This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.

2-29

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal islocated on the lowerportion of the instrumentpanel to the left of thesteering wheel.

This vehicle has a push-to-release parking brake pedal.To set the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal down with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light onthe instrument panel cluster should come on. If itdoes not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-60 formore information.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parking brakepedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, theparking brake pedal will follow it to the releasedposition.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.

2-30

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Ifyou have left the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the

button on the front of the shift lever while pushingthe lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.Release the button.

3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedaldown, set the parking brake with your left foot.See Parking Brake on page 2-30 for moreinformation.

4. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After youhave moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can movethe shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushingthe button on the shift lever. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).

2-31

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply your regularbrake before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe vehicle is running. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-26.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever – push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) and release the shift lever button asyou maintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannotshift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Press the OFF/ACCESSORY button twice to placethe ignition in accessory mode.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soonas possible.

2-32

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannotsee or smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or overroad debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-33

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-33.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif the climate control fan is at the highestsetting. One place this can happen is agarage. Exhaust — with CO — can come ineasily. NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-26.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake after you move the shift lever toPARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-31.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

2-34

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming insiderearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For moreinformation about OnStar®, see OnStar® System onpage 2-39.

O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on the lowerleft side of the mirror, is used for the automatic dimmingfunctions of the rearview mirror. If the vehicle has theSmartBeam Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp ControlSystem, the on/off button can also be used to turn off orreset this system. See “SmartBeam IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp Control System” underHeadlamps on page 3-31.

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on each time thevehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind the vehicle.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, pressand release the on/off button. The indicator light willilluminate when this feature is on.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ® and CompassThe vehicle may have an automatic dimming insiderearview mirror with OnStar® and a compass. For moreinformation about OnStar®, see OnStar® System onpage 2-39.

The mirror has an eight-point compass display in theupper right corner of the mirror. When on, the compassautomatically calibrates, or sets the driving direction,as the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle has the navigationoption, the direction the vehicle is facing will bedisplayed on the navigation screen.

O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on the lowerleft side of the mirror and is used for the automaticdimming and compass functions of the rearview mirror.If the vehicle has the SmartBeam Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control System, the on/off button canalso be used to turn off or reset this system. See“SmartBeam Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp ControlSystem” under Headlamps on page 3-31.

2-35

Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming feature comes on each time thevehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, pressthe on/off button. The indicator light will illuminatewhen this feature is on.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compass onor off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, thecompass will show two character boxes forapproximately two seconds. After two seconds, themirror will display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after two seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example), there maybe a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by a magneticantenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If theletter C appears in the compass window, the compassmay need to be reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle incircles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display readsa direction.

The compass can be calibrated by pressing andholding the on/off button until a C is shown in thecompass display.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirroris not adjusted for compass variance, the compasscould give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.It will be necessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance if the vehicle isdriven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will benecessary to adjust the compass variance.

2-36

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:1. Find your current location and variance zone

number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on the display,press the on/off button quickly until you reachthe correct zone number. If C appears in thecompass window, the compass may needcalibration. See “Compass Calibration” listedpreviously.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may causethe liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Power Heated Mirrors

The power mirror control ison the driver’s doorarmrest and controls thedriver’s side andpassenger’s side mirrors.

Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selectorcontrol to choose the driver’s side or passenger’s sidemirror. Use the arrows located on the control pad toadjust the position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror soyou can see the side of your vehicle and the areabehind your vehicle. Return the selector switch to thecenter position when finished adjusting. This will preventunwanted mirror movement in case the control pad isaccidentally bumped while driving.

2-37

The preferred mirror positions can be stored with thememory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and SteeringWheel on page 2-64.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward to preventdamage when going through car washes or confinedspaces. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Toreturn the mirror to its original position, push outward.Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfoldedposition before driving.

When the rear window defogger is turned on, bothoutside rear view mirrors are heated to help clear themof ice, snow, or condensation. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Dual Climate Control System onpage 3-47.

Outside Automatic Dimming MirrorThe driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare ofheadlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by theon and off settings on the automatic dimming rearviewmirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® on page 2-35.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen fromthe driver’s seat. This mirror does not have adimming feature.

2-38

Outside Parallel Park Assist MirrorThis feature assists the driver by improving rear obstacledetection and is useful in viewing the curb whenparallel parking.

Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selectorcontrol to choose the driver or passenger outside mirror.When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R), theselected mirror will tilt to a factory programmed position.If further mirror adjustment is needed press thearrows located on the outside mirror control pad. If theoutside mirror selector switch is in the middle position,neither outside mirror will move.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), and afive-second delay has occurred, the mirror will returnto its original position. The delay prevents movement ofthe mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE (R)to AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X) to REVERSE (R)occur during a parallel parking maneuver.

OnStar ® SystemOnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information, and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in the vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press theOnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Terms and conditions of the Subscription ServiceAgreement can be found at www.onstar.com orwww.onstarcanada.com.

OnStar ® ServicesThe Directions and Connections Plan is included onnew vehicles for one year from the date of purchase.The OnStar® subscription can be extended for timebeyond the first year to meet your needs. For moreinformation, press the OnStar® button to speak withan advisor.

2-39

Directions and Connections Plan• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment• Emergency Services• Roadside Assistance• Stolen Vehicle Tracking• AccidentAssist• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert• Remote Diagnostics• Online Concierge• Driving Directions• RideAssist• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar ® Personal CallingAs an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Callingcapability is a hands-free wireless phone that isintegrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placednationwide using simple voice commands with noadditional contracts and no additional roaming charges.To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glovebox, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorVirtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Callingthat uses minutes to access up-to-date weather andtraffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You arealso able to listen and reply to E-mail through thevehicle’s audio system. Customize your informationprofile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’sguide for more information.

OnStar ® Steering Wheel ControlsA steering wheel control can be used to interact with theOnStar® personal calling feature.

Press the control withthis symbol on thesteering wheel to makea phone call.

When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directorynumbers, press the control, say the number (s), thensay “dial”.

See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.

2-40

HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up to threehand-held transmitters used to activate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

If the Valet Lockout feature is on, it will disable theHomeLink® transmitter. See Valet Lockout Switch onpage 2-22, for additional information.

2-41

Programming the HomeLink ®

TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of thesteps involved, it may be helpful to have another personavailable to assist you in programming the transmitter.Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theinternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Programming HomeLink ®

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

2-42

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressedand released.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You donot want to repeat step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

2-43

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons dothe following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.Do not hold the two outside buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink ® ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Donot release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

2-44

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glovebox has a light inside.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle has two cupholders in the centerconsole area.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console storage arealocated between the front seats. It includes storageareas, and accessory power outlet(s) on the rear ofthe console.

Convenience NetIf your vehicle has a convenience net, the conveniencenet attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear ofthe vehicle using six anchor points. The net can be usedlike a hammock across the rear of the vehicle orhooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocery bags,behind the net. It can help keep them from fallingover during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them inthe rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.

2-45

SunroofThe vehicle may have a power sunroof.

The switches that operatethe sunroof are located onthe overhead console.

To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be ONor Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24.

Express Open: The express open feature will operatefrom the closed or partially open position. To expressopen the power sunroof, press the driver’s side sunroofswitch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in adesired position other than to the express open position,press the switch again, in either direction, to stop themovement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, itwill open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.

Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to the ventposition from the closed position, press and holdthe passenger’s side sunroof switch forward. The rear ofthe sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full ventposition. The sunshade must be opened manually.

Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controlsaccording to one of the following:

• From the open position, press and hold the driver’sside sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must beclosed manually.

• From the vent position, press and hold thepassenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.

Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroofwhile it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at the pointof the obstruction. The sunroof will then return tothe full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof onceit has re-opened, refer to the two options previouslydescribed under the “Close” feature instructions.

2-46

Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle is equipped with personalization that allowsyou to program certain features to a preferred settingfor up to two people. The number of programmablefeatures varies depending upon which vehicle optionsare purchased.

On all vehicles, features such as climate controlsettings, radio and XM™ preset settings, exterior lightingat unlock and remote lock, unlock confirmation andlanguage have already been programmed for yourconvenience. Your vehicle also has an automatic doorlocking feature that is always on. You cannot turnthe automatic door locking feature off. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-12.

Some vehicles are equipped with additional features thatcan be programmed including the seat, steeringcolumn, and outside rearview mirror position.

If your vehicle has the base audio system, the followinginformation explains the vehicle personalization onyour vehicle.

If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see“Personalization” in the Index of the STS NavigationSystem manual for information on vehiclepersonalization.

If your vehicle is equipped with the ability to programadditional personalization features, the driver’spreferences are recalled by pressing any button on thekeyless access transmitter, 1 or 2 or by selectingDriver 1 or 2 on the radio display. Certain features canbe programmed not to recall until the ignition isturned off.To change feature preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Personal Settings MenuTo enter the feature programming mode, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACC position, orin RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P) orthe vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (9 km/h).

2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless accesstransmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 orDriver 2.

3. Turn on the radio by pressing thepower/volume knob.

4. Press the CNFG radio button or the tune/selectknob located on the right side of the radio toenter the radio’s main menu.

5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the

SETUP menu.

2-47

7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to PERSONALSETTINGS MENU, then press the tune/select knobto turn the feature on. A check mark appearsafter this selection when it is turned on and theentire list of personalization features will appear.

8. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the featureyou want to change, then press the tune/selectknob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature isturned on, a check mark will appear next tothe feature name.Some features have submenus that show additionalfeatures that can be turned on or off. Afterentering a submenu, turn the tune/select knob andscroll to the feature you want to change, thenpress the tune/select knob to turn the featureon or off.

Personal Settings Menu ItemsThe PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selectedwith a check mark to program the personalizationfeatures. If it is not selected, press the tune/select knobuntil the check mark appears. If it is selected, theentire list of features will be available to program.

DRIVER GREETINGThis feature allows you to type in a customized name orgreeting that will appear on the display whenever thecorresponding keyless access transmitter, 1 or 2, is usedor Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display.

If a customized name or greeting is not programmed, thesystem will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspondwith the numbers on the back of the keyless accesstransmitters. In this case, the customized driver greetingfeature is factory shipped as off.

To turn the driver greeting feature on and to programa customized name or greeting, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU byfollowing the instructions listed previously under“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”

2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETINGis highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVERGREETING feature.You will see a cursor on the screen.

2-48

4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach the firstletter you want; the letter will be highlighted. Thereis a complete alphabet with both upper andlower case letters and the numbers zero throughnine. Also included are spaces and other non-lettercharacters such as the ampersand (&).

5. Press the tune/select knob once to select the letter.The letter will then appear on the display and thecursor will advance to the next letter.If you make a mistake, press the F5 button, locatedon the radio, repeatedly to cycle back through allof the characters until you reach the character youwish to change. Then turn the tune/select knobuntil the letter you want is highlighted and press thetune/select knob to select the new letter.

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greetingyou want is complete. You can program up to16 characters.

The name or greeting you programmed is now set. Youcan either exit the programming mode by followingthe instructions later in this section or program the nextfeature available on your vehicle by pressing the

F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to return to thePERSONAL SETTINGS MENU. You will now see acheck mark next to the driver greeting menu item, whichmeans that the driver greeting feature is on and acustomized driver greeting is being used.

To turn off the customized driver greeting, and go backto displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2, use thefollowing procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETINGis highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVERGREETING feature. The check mark will be clearedand the customized driver greeting is off.

The only way to correct a customized driver greetingonce you have exited the screen to spell the name, is toturn the driver greeting feature off, and then turn itback on.

2-49

KEY FOB REMINDERThis feature chirps the horn three times when thedriver’s door is closed and there is a keyless accesstransmitter left inside of the vehicle. This will only occurwhen the vehicle is off.Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFFBefore your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it wasprogrammed to Mode 1. The mode to which thevehicle was programmed may have been changed sinceit left the factory.To program the vehicle to a different mode, use thefollowing procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOBREMINDER is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forthbetween on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear next to the feature name.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle.

REMOTE STARTThis feature (if equipped) allows you to choose thefeatures you would like to have activated whenyou engage the remote start on your vehicle. Thesefeatures include the climate control system, therear defogger and the seat temperature (if equipped).Activating these features helps provide a morecomfortable vehicle upon entry. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Keyless Access System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it wasprogrammed to Mode 1. The mode to which thevehicle was programmed may have been changed sinceit left the factory.

To program the vehicle to a different mode, use thefollowing procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE STARTis highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forthbetween on and off.

2-50

When REMOTE START is on, a check mark will appearnext to the feature name. You can then choose toactivate any or all of the following features by turningthe tune/select knob to highlight the feature, thenpressing the knob to turn it on.

CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control system willengage when the vehicle is started using the remotestart feature. It will be at the same climate control settingthat was last used by the driver using that keylessentry transmitter.

REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active, therear defogger will engage when the vehicle is startedusing the remote start feature.

SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If this featureis active, the seats will be heated or cooled, ifequipped, when the vehicle is started using the remotestart feature.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,located on the radio, to return to the PERSONALSETTINGS MENU.

REMOTE RECALL MEMORYIf your vehicle has the optional memory package, youwill have this feature. When this feature is turned on, youcan recall any previously programmed seat positionand mirror position when the unlock button on thekeyless access transmitter is pressed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFFBefore your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it wasprogrammed to Mode 2 with the exception of recallseat to driver position which is on. The mode to whichthe vehicle was programmed may have been changedsince it left the factory.To program the vehicle to a different mode, use thefollowing procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE RECALLMEMORY is highlighted.


2-51


START BUTTON RECALLIf your vehicle has the optional memory package, youwill have this feature. When this feature is turned on, youcan recall any previously programmed seat, mirrorand steering column position when the start button onthe ignition is pressed.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until START BUTTONRECALL is highlighted.



AUTO EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has the optional memory package, youwill have this feature. When this feature is turned on, youcan recall any previously programmed exit position forthe driver’s seat when the vehicle is off, the shift lever isin PARK (P) and the driver’s door is opened.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF


2-52



2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT SEATis highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forthbetween on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear in the box next to the feature name.


AUTO EXIT COLUMNIf your vehicle has the optional memory package, youwill have this feature. When this feature is turned on, youcan recall any previously programmed exit position forthe steering column when the vehicle is off, the shiftlever is in PARK (P) and the driver’s door is opened.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXITCOLUMN is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forthbetween on and off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear in the box next to the feature name.


2-53

LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCKThis feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when thekeyless access transmitter is used to unlock thevehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature towork, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lampsor headlamps are on.

If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and eitherKEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash whenthe doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK” later in this section for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH ATUNLOCK is highlighted.



LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCKThis feature allows the exterior lamps to flash oncewhen the keyless access transmitter is used to lock thevehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature towork, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lampsor headlamps are on.

If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and eitherKEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash whenthe doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK” later in this section for more information.

2-54

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON



2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH ATLOCK is highlighted.


You can select this feature by itself, or you can combineit with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirps when you lockyour vehicle.The mode you selected is now set. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle.

EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCKThis feature turns on the exterior lamps when thekeyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unlessa door is opened, the ignition is turned to ACC, ONor START or the keyless access transmitter is used tolock the vehicle.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTS ATUNLOCK is highlighted.

2-55



HORN CHIRPS AT LOCKThis feature sounds the horn once when the keylessaccess transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doorsmust be closed for this feature to work.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPS ATLOCK is highlighted.



TWILIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of time youwant the exterior lamps to remain on after you exitthe vehicle.Programmable Modes

Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)

Mode 2: 0:05 seconds



Mode 5: 1:30 minutes




2-56

Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it wasprogrammed to Mode 2. The mode to which thevehicle was programmed may have been changed sincethe vehicle left the factory.

To determine the mode to which the vehicle isprogrammed or to program the vehicle to a differentmode, use the following procedure:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHT DELAYis highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through theavailable delay settings and set your selection.If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will notilluminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one modecan be selected at a time.


DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFFThis feature allows the driver’s door to automaticallyunlock when the ignition is turned off.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCKAT OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between onand off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear next to the feature name.


2-57

DOORS UNLOCK AT OFFThis feature allows all of the doors to automaticallyunlock when the ignition is turned off.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCKAT OFF is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between onand off.When the mode is turned on, a check mark willappear next to the feature name.


DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARKThe feature allows the driver’s door to automaticallyunlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCKIN PARK is highlighted.



2-58

DOORS UNLOCK IN PARKThe feature allows all of the doors to automaticallyunlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCKIN PARK is highlighted.



KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCKThis feature automatically unlocks the appropriate frontdoor when you approach the vehicle with your keylessaccess transmitter and pull the respective door handle.See Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON



2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FT DOORUNLOCK is highlighted.



2-59

KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCKThis feature automatically unlocks all of the doors whenyou approach the vehicle with your keyless accesstransmitter and pull either front door handle. See DoorLocks on page 2-11 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS DOORSUNLOCK is highlighted.



LOCK DELAYThis feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors forup to five seconds after a power door lock switch orthe lock button on the keyless access transmitteris pressed. The five second delay occurs after the lastdoor is closed. If the keyless access transmitter isleft inside of the vehicle, the doors will not lock.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF


2-60



2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAYis highlighted.



KEYLESS LOCK DELAYThis feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors forup to five seconds after the lock button on the keylessaccess transmitter is pressed. The five second delayoccurs after the last door is closed. If the keyless accesstransmitter is left inside of the vehicle, the doors willnot lock.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS LOCKDELAY is highlighted.



2-61

FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCKThis feature allows you to choose whether or not tohave the front passenger window deactivated as part ofthe window lockout button. If you would like the frontpassenger window to be deactivated when the windowlockout button is pushed, turn this feature on. If thisfeature is left off, the window lockout button located onthe door will deactivate only the rear windows. SeePower Windows on page 2-17 for more information.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: ON

Mode 2: OFF




2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASSWINDOW LOCK is highlighted.



CHIME VOLUME HIGHThis feature allows you to adjust the volume level of thevehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannotbe turned off, only adjusted.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: NORMAL

Mode 2: HIGH


2-62



2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIME VOLUMEHIGH is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forthbetween the normal and high settings. A checkmark indicates that the chime volume is setto HIGH.


SUSPENSION MODEIf your vehicle has this feature, you can select betweenperformance or touring modes. Performance mode isused where road conditions or personal preferencedemand more control. This setting provides more “feel”or response to road conditions. Touring mode isused for normal city and highway driving. This settingprovides a smooth, soft ride.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: PERFORMANCE

Mode 2: TOURING




2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSIONMODE is highlighted.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter theSUSPENSION MODE submenu.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlight TOURING orPERFORMANCE.

5. Press the tune/select knob to select the setting.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,located on the radio, to return to the PERSONALSETTINGS MENU.

2-63

Exiting the Personal Settings MenuOnce you have finished making your selections on thebase audio system, you will automatically return tothe main audio screen after 15 seconds. You can alsopress the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio,to return to the main audio screen.

Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering WheelIf your vehicle has the memory feature, you canprogram and recall memory settings for the followingfeatures for up to two drivers:

• The driver’s seat position

• The outside rearview mirrors position

• The telescopic steering column position, if equipped

The following settings and presets are set automatically:

• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), lastdisplayed stations and compact disc position

• The last climate control setting

• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if equipped

• Other personalization settings (for example, remotestart settings)See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-47.

For vehicles with the base audio system, memoryfeatures are programmed and recalled through the radiofrom the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER EXITSETTINGS submenus. See “Entering the DriverSelection Submenu” and “Entering the Driver ExitSettings Submenu” later in this section for moreinformation on recalling and programming the memorysettings using the base audio system.

For vehicles with the Navigation system, memoryfeatures are programmed and recalled through thenavigation display. See “Personalization” in the Index ofthe STS Navigation System manual for moreinformation on programming and recalling the memorysettings using the Navigation system.

For vehicles with the Navigation system, you can alsorecall the memory features by using voice recognition, ifequipped. See “Voice Recognition” in the Index of theSTS Navigation System manual for more information.

2-64

Entering the Driver Selection SubmenuTo enter the memory programming mode for yourdriver settings, use the following procedure:




4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the mainmenu of the radio.


SETUP menu.7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER

SELECTION.8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER

SELECTION submenu. The following itemswill appear:

• DRIVER 1

• DRIVER 2

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS

Driver Selection Submenu ItemsDRIVER 1/DRIVER 2The numbers on the back of each keyless accesstransmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2. Ifyou would like to recall or store driver settings forthe driver that does not correspond to the number onthe back of the keyless access transmitter that you areusing, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the memory programming mode for yourdriver settings by following the instructions listedpreviously under “Entering the Driver SelectionSubmenu.”

2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn thetune/select knob to highlight the driver number thatyou want, either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.

3. Set your choice by pressing in the tune/select knob.If you would like to recall driver settings for theselected driver, see “RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS”later in this section.If you would like to store driver settings for theselected driver, see “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS”later in this section.If you would like to recall exit settings for theselected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS”later in this section.If you would like to store exit settings for theselected driver, see “STORE EXIT SETTINGS”later in this section.

2-65

RECALL DRIVER SETTINGSTo recall driver settings, use the following procedure:


2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn thetune/select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVERSETTINGS and press in the knob.If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will soundand your previously saved driving position willthen be recalled.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps willsound and your previously saved driving position willnot be recalled.

A memory recall can be stopped by pressing anymemory seat or mirror position button.

If you would like the stored driving positions to berecalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keylessaccess transmitter or when starting your vehicle,see “REMOTE RECALL MEMORY” or “STARTBUTTON RECALL” under Vehicle Personalization onpage 2-47.

STORE DRIVER SETTINGSTo store driver settings, use the following procedure:

1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outsiderearview mirrors and the steering column to acomfortable driving position.


3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn thetune/select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVERSETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps willsound to confirm that your driver settings are saved.

4. Set the HUD position, if equipped, the climatecontrol temperature, fan speed and modesettings, the radio presets, tone, volume,playback mode (AM/FM, XM™, or CD) andcompact disc position.Your memory settings are now programmed. Anychanges that are made to the HUD, audiosystem and climate controls while driving will beautomatically stored when the ignition isturned off.

5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver byprogramming the other driver number.

2-66

Entering the Driver Exit SettingsSubmenuTo enter the memory programming mode for your exitsettings, use the following procedure:




4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the mainmenu of the radio.


SETUP menu.7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER

EXIT SETTINGS.8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER

EXIT SETTINGS submenu. The following itemswill appear:

• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS• STORE EXIT SETTINGS

Driver Exit Settings Submenu ItemsRECALL EXIT SETTINGSTo recall exit settings, use the following procedure:

1. Enter the memory programming mode for your exitsettings by following the instructions listedpreviously under “Entering the Driver Exit SettingsSubmenu.”

2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu, turnthe tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL EXITSETTINGS and press in the knob.If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will soundand your previously saved exit position will thenbe recalled.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps willsound and your previously saved exit positionwill not be recalled.A memory recall can be stopped by pressing anymemory seat or mirror position button.

If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalledwhen your vehicle is in PARK (P), the vehicle is offand the driver’s door is opened, see “AUTO EXIT SEAT”and “AUTO EXIT COLUMN” under VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47.

2-67

STORE EXIT SETTINGSTo store exit settings, use the following procedure:

1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outsiderearview mirrors and the steering column to acomfortable exit position.

2. Enter the memory programming mode for your exitsettings by following the instructions listedpreviously under “Entering the Driver Exit SettingsSubmenu.”

3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu, turnthe tune/select knob to scroll to STORE EXITSETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beepswill sound to confirm that your new exit settingsare saved.

4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver byprogramming the other driver number.

2-68

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .........................................3-6Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System ................3-9Flash-to-Pass ...............................................3-13Windshield Wipers ........................................3-13Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-14Windshield Washer .......................................3-15Headlamp Washer ........................................3-16Cruise Control ..............................................3-16Adaptive Cruise Control .................................3-19Headlamps ..................................................3-31Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-35Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-35Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-35Fog Lamps ..................................................3-37Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-37Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-38Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-39Entry Lighting ...............................................3-39

Parade Dimming ...........................................3-39Reading Lamps ............................................3-40Battery Load Management .............................3-40Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-40Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-41Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-44Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-46Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-46

Climate Controls ............................................3-47Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-47Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-52Rear Climate Control System .........................3-53Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-54

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-56Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-57Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-58Tachometer .................................................3-58Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-58Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-59Charging System Light ..................................3-60Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-60Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-61Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ....................3-62Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-62Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-63Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-63

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-64Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-66Security Light ...............................................3-67Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-67Lights On Reminder ......................................3-67Cruise Control Light ......................................3-68Highbeam On Light .......................................3-68Fuel Gage ...................................................3-68

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-69DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-69DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-74Other Messages ...........................................3-86

Audio System(s) .............................................3-87Setting the Time ...........................................3-87Radio with CD ..............................................3-88Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-106Radio Personalization ..................................3-107Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-110Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-111Radio Reception .........................................3-112Care of Your CDs .......................................3-113Care of Your CD Player ...............................3-113Diversity Antenna System .............................3-114XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-114

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 3-39. Driver InformationCenter (DIC) Buttons. See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 3-69. HUD Controls (If Equipped).See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 3-44.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. HeadlampControls. See Headlamps on page 3-31. CruiseControl. See Cruise Control on page 3-16. AdaptiveCruise Control (If Equipped). See Adaptive CruiseControl on page 3-19. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)(If Equipped). See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 3-9.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-57.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See WindshieldWipers on page 3-13.

E. Navigation/Radio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 3-87 and Navigation/Radio System onpage 3-106.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). SeeAudio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-111.Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button (If Equipped).See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped). SeeHeated Steering Wheel on page 3-7.

G. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.H. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.I. Climate Control System. See Dual Climate Control

System on page 3-47.J. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 3-6.K. Cupholders. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-45.L. Traction Control System Button. See Traction Control

System (TCS) on page 4-8.M. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation

on page 2-26.N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-45.

3-5

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is located onthe console, near theshift lever. See InstrumentPanel Overview onpage 3-4.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key is not in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on your steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

The power tilt wheelcontrol is located on theoutboard side of thesteering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the control upand the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control downand the steering wheel will go down.

3-6

If the power tilt control is pressed up or down and heldin that position, there will be a slight movement anda slight pause followed by a continuous movement in thedirection the control is being pressed. This allowsvery fine control of the steering wheel position. If thecontrol is bumped, the steering wheel movesapproximately one degree in the direction commanded.

Push the control forward and the steering wheelmoves toward the front of the vehicle. Push the controlrearward and the steering wheel moves toward therear of the vehicle. To set the memory position,see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-47 and MemorySeat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-64.

Heated Steering WheelYour vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.

The button for thisfeature is located onthe steering wheel.

Press the bottom of the button to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light on the button will displaywhile the feature is on.

The steering wheel will take about three minutes toreach it’s maximum temperature.

3-7

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and

Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.• O Headlamps. See Headlamps on page 3-31.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.

• Flash-To-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Passon page 3-13.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-37.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 3-16.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped). See AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19.

• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page 3-9.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. The lever returns automatically when the turnis complete.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash tosignal a lane change. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete. The lever returns to its originalposition when it’s released.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn orlane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.Other driver’s won’t see the signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs ifthe arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-93 for more information.

3-8

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), awarning chime will sound and the Turn Signal Onmessage will appear on the Driver Information Center(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-74 for more information.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward on the turn signal/multifunction leverto change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pullthe lever back and then release it to change from highto low beam.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill be on, indicatinghigh-beam usage.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read thisentire section before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:




3-9

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides anaudible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle toorapidly. FCA also provides a visual warning with noaudible warning if you are following another vehiclemuch too closely. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Controlradar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,within a distance of 328 ft (100 m).

{CAUTION:

FCA is only a warning system and does notapply the brakes. FCA is not designed to warnthe driver of pedestrians or animals. When youare approaching a vehicle or object, FCA maynot provide you with enough time to avoid acollision. Your complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and you should be readyto take action and apply the brakes. For moreinformation, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

The Forward Collision Alert(FCA) controls are locatedon the end of themultifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

To enable FCA, move the Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch to on. To disable FCA, move the switch to off.

Make sure the Head-Up Display is on and properlyadjusted. If the HUD is not on, FCA will not be enabledand you will not be provided with FCA audible andvisual warnings. See Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 3-41 for more information.

3-10

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, FCA may not detect avehicle ahead. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on FCAon winding roads.

• When visibility is low, such as in fog, rain,or snow, FCA performance is limited.There may not be enough warningdistance to the vehicle in front of you. Donot rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.

{CAUTION:

When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive CruiseControl switch is on. If you press the AdaptiveCruise Control button, you might go intocruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Be careful notto press adaptive cruise buttons unless youwant to use cruise control.

Warning the Driver

The alert symbol willflash on the HUD and awarning beep willsound when driver actionmay be required.

The driver warning is active when:

• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.

• You are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.

See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 formore information.

3-11

Detecting the Vehicle AheadThe vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUDwhen a vehicle ahead of you is detected in yourpath. If this symbol does not appear, or disappearsbriefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles you may seeahead. The symbol may disappear on curves, highwayexit ramps, or hills. Also, when another vehicle entersthe same lane as you, the FCA system will notdetect the vehicle until it is completely in yourdriving lane.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detecta vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid acollision under these conditions. Do not useFCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaningthe System” under Adaptive Cruise Control onpage 3-19.

{CAUTION:

FCA may not detect and warn soon enough tostationary or slow-moving vehicles or otherobjects ahead of you. You could crash into anobject ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA whenapproaching stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects.

Unnecessary WarningsFCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary warningto guard rails, signs, and other stationary objects.This is normal operation, your vehicle does notneed service.

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEANRADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICERADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-74.

3-12

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Ifso, you may need to turn off the engine and cleanthe lens. See “Cleaning the System” under AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows you to use the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you that youwant to pass.

Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever towardyou to use this feature. When you do, the followingwill occur:

• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beamheadlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long asyou hold the lever there. Release the lever toturn them off.

• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they willswitch to low beam. To return to high-beam, pushthe lever away from you.

Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for asingle wiping cycle. The lever will return to its originalposition. For more cycles, hold the lever down beforereleasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delaybetween wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band toset the length of the delay.

3-13

x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set thelength of the delay between wipes when using the delayfeature. The closer you move the band toward mist,the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must bein delay for this feature to work.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position forslow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position forrapid wiping cycles.

If the windshield wipers are in use for about six secondswhile you are driving, the exterior lamps will come onautomatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO. SeeWiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-35 for moreinformation.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do becomedamaged, install new blades. For more information, seeWindshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-50.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Rainsense™ II WipersIf your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor ismounted on the interior side of the windshield behind therearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate thewipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up onthe windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear thewindshield depending on driving conditions andthe sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipeswill occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occurmore frequently. The Rainsense™ wipers operate in adelay mode as well as a continuous low or highspeed as needed. If the system is left on for long periodsof time, occasional wipes may occur without anymoisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicatesthat the Rainsense™ system is activated.

To activate the Rainsense™ system, turn the wiperband to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivitylevels indicated on the wiper stalk. The positionclosest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one.This allows more rain or snow to collect on thewindshield between wipes. Turning the wiper band awayfrom you to higher sensitivity levels increases thesensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes. Thehighest sensitivity setting, level four is closest to low. Asingle wipe will occur each time you turn the wiperstalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate thatthe sensitivity level has been increased.

3-14

Notice: Going through an automatic car wash withthe wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipersoff when going through an automatic car wash.

The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and arenot affected by the Rainsense™ function. TheRainsense™ system can be overridden at any time bymanually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.

When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn onautomatically. The headlamps will turn off again oncethe wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If itis dark, they will remain on. See Wiper ActivatedHeadlamps on page 3-35.

Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on theexterior glass surface directly in front of themoisture sensor. Doing this could cause themoisture sensor to malfunction.

Windshield Washer

K (Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of thesteering column also controls the windshield washer.There is a button at the end of the lever. To spraywasher fluid on the windshield, press the button andhold it. The washer will spray until you release thebutton. The wipers will continue to clear the window forabout six seconds after the button is released andthen stop or return to your preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir islow, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appearon the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It willtake 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for thismessage to turn off. For information on the correctwasher fluid mixture to use, see Windshield WasherFluid on page 5-34 and Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12.

3-15

Headlamp WasherYour vehicle may have headlamp washers.The headlamp washers clear debris from theheadlamp lenses.

The headlamp washers are located to the inside ofthe headlamps.

To wash the headlamps, press the washer buttonlocated at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Boththe headlamps and the windshield will be washed.

The headlamps must be on to be washed. If theheadlamps are off, only the windshield will be washedwhen the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid islow, the headlamp washers will not work.See Windshield Washer on page 3-15 foradditional information.

Cruise ControlThese controls are locatedon the end of themultifunction lever.

9(Off): This position turns the system off.

R(On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbolto make the vehicle resume to a previously set speedor to accelerate when cruise is already active.

T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speedor to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.

3-16

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Stabilitrak®

System on page 4-10. When road conditions allow youto safely use it again, you may turn the cruise controlback on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

This light on theinstrument panel clusterwill come on whilecruise control is on.

3-17

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course,disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need toreset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, youcan move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehiclewill keep going faster until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’thold the switch at resume/accelerate.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the acceleratorpedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed while usingcruise control:

• Press in the button at the end of the lever until youreach the lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressthe set button. Each time you do this, you’ll goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

3-18

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake to keepyour speed down. Applying the brake will take you out ofcruise control. If you need to apply the brake due tothe grade of the downhill slope, you may not wantto attempt to use your cruise control feature.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end a cruise control session, step lightly on thebrake pedal.

Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruisecontrol session only. Move the cruise control switchto off to turn off the system completely.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read thisentire section before using it.

The system operates on a radio frequency subject toFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.







3-19


Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditionalcruise control and is not a safety system. It allowsyou to keep cruise control engaged in moderate trafficconditions without having to constantly reset your cruisecontrol. Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detecta vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance of328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver, thesystem can apply limited braking or acceleration ofthe vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected followdistance to the vehicle ahead. Braking is limited to0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of deceleration, which iscomparable to moderate application of the vehicle’sbrakes. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply thebrake. If no vehicle is in your path, your vehicle willreact like traditional cruise control.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hardbraking or bring the vehicle to a completestop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,pedestrians or animals. When you areapproaching a vehicle or object, AdaptiveCruise Control may not have time to slow yourvehicle enough to avoid a collision. Yourcomplete attention is always required whiledriving and you should be ready to take actionand apply the brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

3-20

{CAUTION:

• On winding roads, Adaptive CruiseControl may not detect a vehicle ahead.You could crash into a vehicle ahead ofyou. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlon winding roads.

• In heavy stop-and-go traffic, AdaptiveCruise Control may not have time to slowyour vehicle enough to avoid a collisionbecause of the rapidly changing trafficconditions. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl in heavy stop-and-go traffic.

• On slippery roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheelspinning, and you could lose control. Donot use cruise control on slippery roads.

• When visibility is low, such as in fog, rainor snow, Adaptive Cruise Controlperformance is limited. There may not beenough distance to adapt to the changingtraffic conditions. Do not use cruisecontrol when visibility is low.

The Adaptive Cruisecontrols are locatedon the end of themultifunction lever.

9 (Off): This position turns the system off.

R (On): This position turns the system on.

S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbolto make the vehicle resume to a previously set speedor to increase the set speed when Adaptive CruiseControl is already active.

T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set thespeed or to decrease the set speed when AdaptiveCruise Control is already active.

3-21

Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control Withthe Set Button

{CAUTION:

If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch on when you are not using cruise, youmight hit a button and go into cruise when youdo not want to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Controlswitch off until you want to use cruise control.

{CAUTION:

If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control withoutyour Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may notbe visible. You could forget your settings andbe startled by Adaptive Cruise Controlresponse and even lose control. Keep yourHUD on and properly adjusted when usingAdaptive Cruise Control.

The set speed is selected by the driver. This is thespeed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected inyour path.

To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:

1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on andproperly adjusted. You cannot engage AdaptiveCruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 3-41 for more information.

2. Move the switch to on.

3. Get up to the speed you want.

4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever andrelease it.

5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is tooclose or moving slower than your vehicle.

3-22

This symbol will appear onthe Head-Up Display(HUD) to indicate thatAdaptive Cruise Control isactive. The numberindicates the set speed.

See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-41 formore information.

Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so youknow the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if avehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speedlimits, surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditionswhen adjusting your set speed.

If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 andStabilitrak® System on page 4-10. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may turn theAdaptive Cruise Control back on.

Increasing Set Speed While Using AdaptiveCruise ControlThere are two ways to increase the set speed:

• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.Press the set button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the accelerator pedal.You will now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on toresume/increase. Hold it there until the desired setspeed is displayed in the HUD, then release theswitch. To increase your set speed in verysmall amounts, move the switch briefly toresume/increase. Each time you do this, yourvehicle set speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the systemdetermines there is not a vehicle in front of you. Atthat point, your vehicle speed will increase to theset speed.

United States versionshown, Canada similar

3-23

Decreasing Set Speed While UsingAdaptive Cruise ControlPress in the set/decrease button on the end of the leveruntil you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.

To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press theset/decrease button. Each time you do this, yourset speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at adesired speed and then you apply the brake. This willdisengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you donot need to reset it.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly from onto resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control will beengaged with the previously chosen set speed.

Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it willadjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the followdistance (gap) you select.

Use the GAP button onthe steering wheel toadjust the follow distance.

Press the top of the button to increase the distance orthe bottom of the button to decrease the distance.The first button press will show you the current followdistance setting on the HUD. Your current followdistance setting will be maintained until you change it.

There are six follow distances to choose from. Thefollow distance selection ranges from near to far(one second to two seconds follow time). The distancemaintained for a selected follow distance will varybased on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speedthe further back you will follow. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting the follow distance.The range of selectable distances may not beappropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If youprefer to travel at a follow distance farther thanAdaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage the systemand drive manually.

3-24

A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected followdistance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.The vehicles will move closer together as you select asmaller follow distance.

Alerting the Driver

The alert symbol will flashon the HUD and a warningbeep will sound whendriver action is required.

Driver action is required when:

• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficientbraking because you are approaching a vehicletoo rapidly.

• The vehicle speed drops below about20 mph (32 km/h).

• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive CruiseControl from operating. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74 for more information.

• A malfunction is detected in the system. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information.

See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control has only limitedbraking ability to slow your vehicle. In somecases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not havetime to slow your vehicle enough to avoid acollision. Be ready to take action and apply thebrakes yourself. See Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-25

Approaching and Following a Vehicle

The vehicle ahead symbolwill only appear on theHUD when a vehicle aheadis detected in your path.

If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles youmay see ahead.

{CAUTION:

When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detecta vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control maynot have time to slow your vehicle enough toavoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive CruiseControl when the radar is blocked by snow,ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See“Cleaning the System” later in this section.

Adaptive Cruise Control will, automatically, slow yourvehicle down when approaching a slower movingvehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow thevehicle in front at the selected follow distance. Yourspeed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle infront of you but will not exceed the set speed. Itmay apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking isactive, your brake lights will come on. It may feel orsound different than if you were applying the brakesyourself. This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detectand react to stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects ahead of you. Youcould crash into an object ahead of you. Donot use Adaptive Cruise Control whenapproaching stationary or slow-movingvehicles or other objects.

3-26

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect andreact to stationary or slow-moving vehicles orother objects ahead of you. Your vehicle mayaccelerate toward objects, such as a stoppedvehicle that suddenly appears after the leadvehicle changes lanes. Your complete attentionis always required while driving and you shouldbe ready to take action and apply the brakes.

Low-Speed DeactivationIf your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) whilefollowing a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control willbegin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on the HUDwill flash and the warning beep will sound. The drivermust take action since Adaptive Cruise Control willnot slow the vehicle to a stop.

Deactivation When Head-Up Display isTurned OffIf you turn the HUD off when Adaptive Cruise Control isengaged, it will begin to disengage. A warning beepwill sound and the message RADAR CRUISE NOTREADY will appear on the Driver Information Center

(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74for additional information. If Adaptive Cruise Controlwas braking when the HUD is turned off, the braking willcontinue briefly.

Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive CruiseControl OverrideIf you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use theaccelerator pedal. While you are doing this, thesystem will not automatically apply the brakes. A PEDALAPPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will appear onthe HUD. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-41 foradditional information. Once you pass the vehicle andremove your foot from the accelerator pedal, AdaptiveCruise Control will return to normal operation andbe able to apply the brakes, if needed.

{CAUTION:

If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,the system will not automatically apply thebrakes. You could crash into a vehicle aheadof you. Do not rest your foot on the acceleratorpedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.

3-27

Curves in the Road

{CAUTION:

Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations incurves, it may respond to a vehicle in anotherlane, or may not have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash into a vehicleahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.Give extra attention in curves and be ready touse the brakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving in curves.

Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the curve istoo sharp.

When following a vehicle and entering a curve, AdaptiveCruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in yourlane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.

3-28

Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide adriver alert and/or braking that you considerunnecessary. It could respond to signs, guardrailsand other stationary objects when entering or exiting acurve. This is normal operation. Your vehicle doesnot need service.

Highway Exit Ramps

{CAUTION:

Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of thevehicle ahead and accelerate up to your setspeed while entering or on highway exitramps. You could be startled by thisacceleration and even lose control of thevehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise Controlbefore entering a highway exit ramp. Do notuse Adaptive Cruise Control on exit ramps.

3-29

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, AdaptiveCruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it iscompletely in the lane. Be ready to take action and applythe brakes yourself.

Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hillsand When Towing a Trailer

How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills andwhen towing a trailer depends on your speed, vehicleload, traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills.

It may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving onhills. When going up steep hills, you may want touse the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. Whengoing downhill when towing a trailer, you may want tobrake to keep your speed down. Applying the brakedisengages the system. You may choose not touse Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills when towinga trailer.

Disengaging Adaptive Cruise ControlTo disengage the system, apply the brake pedal ormove the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to off. AdaptiveCruise Control information will not appear on the HUDwhen the system is not engaged.

Erasing Set Speed MemoryWhen you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch orthe ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.

3-30

Other MessagesThere are three messages that may appear on the DIC.They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, RADARCRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR. Thesemessages will appear to indicate a problem withthe Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74 for more information.

Cleaning the SystemThe radar can become blocked by snow, ice or dirt. Ifso, you may need to turn off the engine and cleanthe lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Controlin icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as infog, rain or snow.

The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.

To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with asoft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, engage theAdaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do so, seeyour dealer.

Headlamps

The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of theturn signal/multifunction lever.

O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with thissymbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has four positions:

O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn offall lamps and automatic lighting features includingDaytime Running Lamps and Intellibeam.

This is a “momentary” switch that will spring back to theAUTO position when released. An AUTOMATICLIGHTS ON message will appear on the DIC whenautomatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTSOFF message will appear on the DIC when theautomatic lights are disabled.

3-31

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position toput the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode,if enabled, will turn the exterior lamps on and offdepending upon how much light is available outside ofthe vehicle.

Due to the “momentary” switch design, your automaticlights may be disabled even if you are in AUTO position.

To enable automatic lighting do any of the following:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the switch. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from the parking lampposition to AUTO.

• Turn the headlamp control from the headlampposition to AUTO.

To disable automatic lighting do any of the following:

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to offand release the switch. It will return back tothe AUTO position by itself.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theparking lamp position.

• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to theheadlamp position.

Disabling automatic lighting will disable the automaticheadlamp operation, DRL, and Intellibeam High-Beams(if equipped).

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

3-32

Intellibeam Intelligent High-BeamHeadlamp Control SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read thisentire section before using it.

Intellibeam is an enhancement to your vehicle’sheadlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on yourrearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’shigh-beam headlamps on and off according tosurrounding traffic conditions. This feature will helpimprove forward visibility during nighttime drivingby initiating high-beam usage as ambient lighting, astraffic conditions allow.

The Intellibeam system will turn your high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no othertraffic present, and the Intellibeam system is enabled.

Enabling IntellibeamTo enable the Intellibeam System, turn the exterior lampcontrol to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunctionlever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light willappear on the instrument panel cluster when thehigh-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light onpage 3-68.

Driving with IntellibeamIntellibeam will only activate your high-beams whendriving over 10 mph (16 km/h).

The high-beam headlamps will remain on until any ofthe following situations occur:

• The system detects an approachingvehicle’s headlamps.

• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.

• The outside light is bright enough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

• The high-beam headlamps are manually turned onor you use the flash-to-pass feature. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9 andFlash-to-Pass on page 3-13.When either of these conditions occur, theIntellibeam feature will be disabled until thehigh-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.

• The exterior lamp control is turned to any settingexcept AUTO.When this occurs, Intellibeam will be disabled untilthe control is turned back to the AUTO position.

• The Intellibeam system is indefinitely disabled atthe rearview mirror.

• The vehicle’s speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h).

3-33

Intellibeam may not turn off the high-beams if thesystem cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because ofany of the following:

• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,snow and/or road spray.

• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected dueto dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,mist or other airborne obstructions.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked orobstructed by something that blocks the view of theIntellibeam light sensor.

• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,haze or other obstructions.

• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end ofthe vehicle points upward, causing the Intellibeamsensor to aim high and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.

You may need to manually disable or cancelthe high-beam headlamps if any of the aboveconditions exist.

Disabling and Resetting Intellibeam at theRearview MirrorIntellibeam can be disabled and reset to the originalfactory setting by using the controls on the face of therearview mirror.

Use the rearview mirror to disable this featurecompletely for an extended period of time and thento reset it.

O (On/Off): To disable the system, press and holdthis button on the rearview mirror for about 20 secondsand release it after the green LED status indicatoron the left side of the rearview mirror flashes two times.This indicates that Intellibeam has been turned offand will not come back on until the system hasbeen reset.

To reset the system, press and hold this button on therearview mirror for about 20 seconds and release itafter the green LED status indicator on the left side ofthe rearview mirror flashes one time. This indicates thatIntellibeam has been reset.

3-34

Cleaning the Intellibeam Light Sensor

The light sensor is locatedon the inside of the vehiclein front of the interiorrearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glasscleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensorwindow. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on thesurface of the sensor window.

Wiper Activated HeadlampsThis feature activates the headlamps and parking lampsafter the windshield wipers have been in use forabout six seconds. For this feature to work, automaticlighting must be enabled. See Headlamps on page 3-31for additional information.

When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activatedheadlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turnoff if the windshield wiper control is turned off.

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the exterior lampcontrol is left on in either the headlamp or parking lampposition and the driver’s door is opened with theignition off. See Lights On Reminder on page 3-67 foradditional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps comeon when the following conditions are met:

• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,

• the automatic lights are enabled, and

• the transmission is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps willbe on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRLare being used. Your instrument panel will not be lit.

3-35

When the automatic lights are enabled and it is darkenough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beamheadlamps will turn on. When it is bright enoughoutside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and theDRL will turn back on. If you start your vehicle in a darkgarage, the automatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it will takeabout one minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesslever is in the full bright position. See InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 3-39.

To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turnthe exterior lamp control off and then do one ofthe following:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parkinglamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to theheadlamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off andback to AUTO.

An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appearon the DIC, showing that automatic lighting hasbeen disabled.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Light Sensor

The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of theinstrument panel. If you cover the sensor, it willread dark, and the exterior lamps may come on whenyou do not need them.

3-36

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better vision in foggy ormisty conditions.

The fog lamp controls are located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

-: The band with this symbol is used to turn the frontfog lamps on and off.

The parking lamps must be on for the fog lampsto work.

To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on thelever up to the dot and release it. The band will returnto its original position.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band up tothe dot and release it. The band will return to itsoriginal position, and the fog lamps will turn off. If youturn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lampswill also turn off. They’ll turn back on again when youswitch back to low-beam headlamps.

Twilight Sentinel ®

Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and offfor you.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes theTwilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.

3-37

With Twilight Sentinel® you will see thefollowing happen:

• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signallamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps andparking lamps will come on. The other lampsthat come on with headlamps will also come on.

• When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch isin the off position.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in full bright position. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 3-39 for more information.

You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when itis dark outside. First set the parking brake while theignition is in OFF/ACC. Then start the vehicle. The lampswill stay off until you release the parking brake.

Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination asyou leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turnedon the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lampswill remain on until:• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the

parking lamp position, or• a delay time that you select has elapsed.

See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-47 to select thedelay time that you want. You can also select nodelay time.If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switchin the parking lamp or headlamp position, the TwilightSentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off assoon as the switch is turned off.As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. This protects against drainingthe battery in case you have accidentally left theheadlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver doesnot work if the headlamps are turned on after theignition is turned off.If you need to leave the lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn thelamps back on.

3-38

Instrument Panel Brightness

This feature controls thebrightness of theinstrument panel lights.

Press in the center knob on the DIC control panel untilthe knob pops out. Then turn the knob clockwise tobrighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them. Ifyou turn the knob completely clockwise, the interiorlamps will turn on.

Entry LightingThe entry lighting system turns on the reading anddome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lampcontrol when a door is opened or if you press the remotekeyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated bythe transmitter, the lighting will remain active forabout 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses thelight sensor; it must be dark outside in order for thelamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 secondsafter the last door is closed. They will dim to off ifthe ignition is on, or immediately deactivate if the powerlocks are activated.

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits dimming of the instrument paneldisplays and backlighting during daylight hours when thekey is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. Thisfeature operates with the light sensor and is fullyautomatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outsideand the parking lamps are active, the instrumentpanel displays can be adjusted by turning the instrumentpanel brightness knob. See Instrument Panel Brightnesson page 3-39 for additional information.

Base Level Shown,Uplevel Similar

3-39

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the overheadconsole. These lamps come on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press the button next to eachlamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.

If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shutoff 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

Battery Load ManagementThe battery load management feature is designed tomonitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine whenthe battery is in a heavy discharge condition. Duringtimes of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at ahigher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting thannormal to make sure the battery charges. High electricalloads may occur when several of the following areon: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear windowdefogger, the climate control fan at high speeds, heatedseats and engine cooling fans.

If the battery continues to discharge, even with theengine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electricalloads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,the rear window defogger may take slightly longerto clear the glass and the fan may cut back to a lowerspeed. For more battery saving information, see “BatterySaver Active Message” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74.

Inadvertent Power Battery SaverThis feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s batteryagainst drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When theignition is turned off, the power to these features willautomatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes ifa new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power willbe restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door isopened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switchis turned on.

3-40

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright, or too high inyour field of view, it may take you more time tosee things you need to see when it is darkoutside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dimand placed low in your field of view.

The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some ofthe driver information that appears on your instrumentpanel cluster on the windshield.The information may be displayed in English or metricunits and appears as an image focused out towardthe front of your vehicle. To change from Englishto metric units, see DIC Controls and Displays onpage 3-69.The HUD consists of the following information:• Speedometer• Turn Signal Indicators• High-Beam Indicator Symbol• Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature

• Check Gages Icon

• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators(If Equipped)

• Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators(If Equipped)

• Radio Features

Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controlsand driving environment just as you would in a vehiclewithout HUD. If you never look at your instrumentpanel cluster, you may not see something important,such as a warning light. Under important warningconditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display inthe HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)for more information.


3-41

The HUD controls arelocated to the left of thesteering wheel on the DICcontrol panel.

~ (Head-Up Display): Press this button to change theposition of the HUD on the windshield. Press the top partof the button to move the HUD image up. Press thebottom part of the button to move the HUD image down.

You can also adjust the brightness of the HUD image.Press the knob on the center of the DIC control panel inuntil it pops out and then pull the knob until is completelyextended. Turn the knob clockwise or counter-clockwiseto increase or decrease the brightness. If you turn theknob all the way to the left, the HUD image will turn off.

To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, dothe following:

1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. Ifyou change your seat position later, you may haveto re-adjust your HUD.

2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom of theHUD button to center the HUD image in your view.The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,not side-to-side.

3. Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to adjustthe brightness of the HUD image.

The brightness of the HUD image is determined by thelight conditions in the direction your vehicle is facingand where you have the HUD set. If you are facing adark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUDmay anticipate that you are entering a dark area andmay begin to dim.To turn the HUD image off, turn the knobcounter-clockwise.Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD imageharder to see.

3-42

As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for lightto shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sunis at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays canshine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the displaydevice within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to thesun changes.

Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to removeany dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarityof the HUD image.

To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaneron a soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, thendry it.

Notice: When cleaning, be careful not toscratch the HUD or camera lenses. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the HUD lens becausethe cleaner could leak inside the unit andcause damage.

If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,check to see if:

• Something is covering the HUD unit.

• The brightness is adjusted properly.

• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.

• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facingis low.

• A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 5-93.

Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If you ever have to have your windshieldreplaced, be sure to get one that is designed for HUDor your HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.

The following Adaptive Cruise Control message mayappear in the HUD:

PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE: This messageindicates that you are pressing your foot on theaccelerator pedal and overriding Adaptive CruiseControl. While you are doing this, the system will notautomatically apply the brakes. Once you remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive CruiseControl will return to normal operation and be able toapply the brakes, if needed.

You may also see an Adaptive Cruise Controlactive symbol, alert symbol or vehicle aheadsymbol. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19for more information.

3-43

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system isdesigned to help you park while the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parkingeasier and help you avoid colliding with objects such asparked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objectsup to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you howclose these objects are from your rear bumper.

{CAUTION:

Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assistsystem, the driver must check carefully beforebacking up. The system does not operate abovetypical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) whileparking. And, the system does not detectobjects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)behind the vehicle.



So, unless you check carefully behind youbefore and when you back up, you could strikechildren, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behindyou, and they could be injured or killed.

Whether or not you are using rear park assist,always check carefully behind your vehiclebefore you back up and then watch closely asyou do.

The URPA display islocated inside the vehicle,above the rear window.It has three color-codedlights that can be seenthrough the rearview mirroror by turning around.

3-44

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift lever ismoved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system turns on, thethree lights on the display will illuminate for one and ahalf seconds to let you know that the system isworking. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at aspeed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light willflash to remind you that the system does not work at aspeed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed ofless than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:

Description English MetricAmber light 5 ft 1.5 m

Amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mAmber/amber/red lights &

continuous chime 20 in 0.5 m

Amber/amber/red lightsflashing & continuous

chime1 ft 0.3 m

A chime will sound the first time an object is detectedbetween 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.

URPA cannot detect objects that are above trunk level.In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyThe light may flash red when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are not keptclean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that mayaffect system performance include things like thevibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of airbrakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning therear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, seeyour dealer.

If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle oran object was hanging out of your trunk during yourlast drive cycle, the light may also flash red. The light willcontinue to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) untilyour vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)without any obstructions behind the vehicle.

For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-86.

3-45

Accessory Power OutletsYour vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipmentsuch as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.

Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the centerconsole, one in the center console lid and there may bean additional outlet in the rear of the center console.

Your vehicle may have a small cap that must beremoved to access the accessory power outlet. If itdoes, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it withthe protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and donot plug in equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating.

Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatibleto the accessory power outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional information onthe accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Check with yourdealer before adding electrical equipment.

Follow the proper installation instructions that areincluded with any electrical equipment you install.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.

Notice: If you put papers or other flammableitems in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage your vehicle. Never put flammable items inthe ashtray.

AshtrayThe ashtray is located under the climate controlpanel on the center console. Press on the door torelease the ashtray.

To empty the ashtray, remove it from the center consoleby gripping the edges and pulling straight out. Toreinstall, push the tray back into place.

There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.

3-46

Cigarette Lighter

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do notuse anything other than the cigarette lighter in theheating element.

The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray. Thevehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for therear seat passengers.

Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will popback out by itself once the element has heated for use.

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed andthe temperature is set, the system will automaticallycontrol the inside temperature, the air delivery mode, theair conditioning compressor, and the fan speed. AUTOwill appear on the display next to the fan, modeindicators, and recirculation indicator if your vehicle isequipped with the optional air quality sensor.

1. Press the AUTO button.

Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,Vehicles Without Similar

3-47

2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting,generally, between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).Choosing the coldest or warmest temperaturesetting will not cause the system to heat or cool anyfaster. If you set the system at the warmesttemperature setting, the system will try tocontinuously heat the vehicle and will not adjust thesystem down as the vehicle warms up.In cold weather, the system may start at reducedfan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into yourvehicle until warmer air is available. The system willstart out blowing air at the floor but may changemodes, automatically, as the vehicle warmsup to maintain the chosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed for warm up will dependon the outside temperature and the length of timethat has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,if necessary.

You can switch from English to metric units through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controlsand Displays on page 3-69.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may notice water dripping underneathyour vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Manual Operation

yNz (Mode): Pressing the mode switch andchanging the mode cancels automatic operation andallows the operator to manually select the air deliverylocation. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

The outboard air outlets will always receiveairflow regardless of the mode selected. See OutletAdjustment on page 3-52 to change this airflow from theoutboard outlets.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Inautomatic operation, cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with some air directed to the outboardoutlets, and a little air directed to the windshield andside windows.

The mode switch can also be used to select the defogmode. Information on defogging and defrosting canbe found later in this section.

3-48

yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancelsautomatic operation and allows the operator to manuallyselect the amount of airflow. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartment air filter mayneed to be replaced. For more information, seePassenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54 andScheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

h (Recirculation): This button controls the airsource for the climate control system. If you are in AUTOmode, pressing this button once will chooserecirculation. This mode keeps outside air from comingin the vehicle and recirculates the air in the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering your vehicle or to help cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly.

Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode andwill shut off when defog mode is selected. Both of thesefeatures are designed to limit fogging in your vehicle.If recirculation is selected during defog mode, it willautomatically turn off after 10 minutes to limit problemswith fogging.

In some conditions, using recirculation for long periodsof time may cause the air inside your vehicle tobecome too dry or stuffy. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,select AUTO to return to automatic climate controloperation or push the recirculation button again to selectoutside air.

Pressing this button a second time selects outside air.

: (Outside Air): This mode forces the systemto pull air from outside the vehicle. It can be used tobring fresh air into the vehicle.

Air Quality Sensor: Your vehicle may be equipped withan optional air quality sensor to help limit the climatecontrol system from pulling in some harmful exhaustfumes from older, poorly running or diesel-equippedvehicles that are driving near you. This sensor, whenactive, will monitor the air quality in front of your vehicleand switch to air recirculation when poor quality air isdetected outside your vehicle. You can activate the airquality sensor on your vehicle (if equipped) by pressingthe AUTO button on your climate control. The wordAUTO will be shown in the center of the climate controldisplay under the outline shape of a vehicle. When the airquality sensor senses poor quality air, the recirculationgraphic will be shown as long as the sensor senses poorquality air.

3-49

Under some conditions, the air quality sensor system willnot operate. In cold weather, the system may not beactive (even if the AUTO indication is displayed) becauseof concerns of fogging your windows, which may occur byactivating recirculation mode. Also, the air quality sensorsystem will not remain in recirculation mode for extendedperiods of time that could cause stuffy or very dryconditions in the vehicle. Following a poorly runningvehicle for an extended period of time may not keeprecirculation active indefinitely.

The air quality sensor will not activate due to organicodors, like skunk, and may not activate on manychemical-related odors. If you wish to limit these types ofodors, you may choose to manually select recirculation.Your vehicle may also be equipped with a charcoal filterthat can limit many odors from being pulled into yourvehicle. This filter, like your engines air cleaner filter, willneed to be changed periodically. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4. The air quality sensor systemdoes not protect against carbon monoxide (CO), whichyou cannot see or smell. See Engine Exhaust onpage 2-33.

O(Power Driver’s Temperature): Press the powerbutton located on the driver’s side of the climate controlpanel to turn the entire climate control system on oroff. Turn the knob to increase or decrease thetemperature inside your vehicle.

O(Power Passenger’s Temperature): Press thepower button located on the passenger’s side ofthe climate control panel to turn the passenger’s climatecontrol system on if they wish to have a differentsetting than the driver. Turn the knob to increase ordecrease the temperature for the front passenger.Turning the passenger’s side power button off will notshut off the climate control system for the passenger.The system will be set to the same setting as the driver.

{ (Ventilated Seat): Press this button (if equipped)to turn on the ventilated seat for the driver’s orpassenger’s side. See Heated and Ventilated Seats onpage 1-4.

J (Heated Seat): Press this button (if equipped) toturn on the heated seat and seatback for the driver’s orpassenger’s side. See Heated and Ventilated Seatson page 1-4.

^ (Air Conditioning): Press this button to manuallyturn off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation or press the A/C OFFbutton again. To limit fogging on the windshield, theair conditioning compressor cannot be in off indefrost mode.

3-50

Sensors

There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,near the windshield.

There is also an interiortemperature sensorlocated next to thesteering wheel on theinstrument panel.

These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the airinside your vehicle, then use the information to maintainthe selected temperature by initiating neededadjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and theair delivery system. The system may also supplycooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. Therecirculation mode may also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the sensors or the automaticclimate control system will not work properly.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear fog fromyour windshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly.

yNz (Mode): Press this button until defog appearson the display.

- (Defog): This mode directs the air between thewindshield and floor outlets with some air supplied to theoutboard panel outlets and side window defoggingoutlets. When you select this mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.

3-51

The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enterdefog mode. If you select recirculation while in defogmode, it will be cancelled after 10 minutes.

If you have fogging on the side windows, remain indefog or defrost mode until they clear.

0 (Defrost): Pressing the defrost button directs mostof the air to the windshield, with some air directed to theside windows and outboard panel outlets. In this mode,the system will automatically turn off recirculation and runthe air-conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannotbe selected while in the defrost mode.

This mode may also cause the fan speed and airtemperature to increase.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in ON or during remote start, if programmed.See “Personal Settings Menu” under VehiclePersonalization on page 2-47 for additional information.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button toturn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clearas much snow from the rear window as possible.

The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed, or if the vehicle’s speedis above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stayon continuously. If turned on again, the defoggerwill only run for about five minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to helpclear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when therear window defogger button is on.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the lever located in the center of each outlet tochange the direction of the airflow, either side-to-side orup and down. Use the thumbwheels to open or closethe outlets to adjust the airflow.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right to open the outletscompletely and allow the maximum amount of airto enter your vehicle. Turn the thumbwheel to the left toclose the outlets and minimize the amount of airentering the vehicle.

3-52

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of your vehiclemore effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is atthe highest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 3-54.

Rear Climate Control System

Your vehicle has a rear climate control system. Thebase model includes air outlets in the rear of the centerconsole for cooling and under-seat air outlets forheating. The temperature, quantity, and air deliverylocation is controlled automatically by the front climatecontrol system.

Some vehicles are equipped with an optional climatecontrol panel for the rear passenger, located on the backof the center console.

The left knob controls the temperature of the air to therear passengers. Turning the knob to the left willmake the air cooler. Turning the knob to the right willmake the air warmer.

3-53

The right knob controls the air delivery to the rearpassengers. Turning the knob all the way to the left willshut off airflow to the rear passengers. Operatingwith the rear air delivery off may make the entire vehiclewarm or cool less quickly. It may also increase the airrush sound of the front system.

Y (Vent): This mode directs all the rear passengerairflow to the outlets in the console. This is the normalposition for cool down conditions.

\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the consoleoutlets and the floor.

[ (Floor): This mode directs all of the airflow to thefloor. This is the normal position for warm up conditions.

The amount of airflow to the rear passengers iscontrolled automatically by the front climate controlsystem, regardless of optional equipment. Airflow to therear system will be turned off when defrost is selectedon the front climate control panel to direct air to clearthe windshield.

Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel,also, have heated rear seats. There are two buttons,each with three indicator lights, located between thetwo climate control knobs on the rear climate controlpanel, to control the rear heated seats. See HeatedSeats on page 1-6 for additional information.

Be sure to keep the area under the front seatsclear of any objects so the air in your vehicle cancirculate effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may be equipped with a passengercompartment air filter. There are two types of filtersavailable. There is a standard dust filter that traps smallparticles including pollen. There is, also, a dust/odorfilter available that traps dust and pollen and also usesa charcoal element to help reduce many offensiveodors from entering your vehicle. Like your vehicle’sengine air cleaner/filter, it will need to be changedperiodically. For information on how often to change thepassenger compartment air filter, see ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

Notice: Driving without a passenger compartmentair filter in place can cause water and smallparticles, like paper and leaves, to be pulled intoyour climate control system which may causedamage to it. Make sure you always replace the oldfilter with a new one.

3-54

The access panel for the passenger compartment airfilter is located under the hood near the windshield,on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for moreinformation on location. See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4 for information on doing yourown service work.

To access the passenger compartment air filter, dothe following:

1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge of theleaf screen vent cover.

2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filteraccess cover in place and slide the cover off.

3. To access the filter, remove the black plastic waterdeflector by lifting the outboard edge of the deflectorto release the retention tab.

4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release theretention tab.

5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward the inboardside and remove it.

6. The top edge of the filter should be visible. Reachin and lift the filter out, pulling upward and towardthe front of the vehicle.

7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into place.Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing towardthe passenger compartment.

Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the waterdeflector, filter cover and the hood seal.

3-55

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the section thattells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’sadvice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know your warninglights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)that works along with the warning lights and gages.See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-69 formore information.

3-56

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know howfast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drivesafely and economically.


3-57

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controls and Displayson page 3-69 for more information.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works togetherwith the driver information center. You can set a TripA and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 3-69 for moreinformation.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one will be set to the correct mileage total of theold odometer.

Tachometer

This gage indicates theengine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehiclecould be damaged, and the damages would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer in the shadedwarning area.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the ignition is turned on, a chime will be providedfor several seconds to remind people to buckle theirsafety belts. The driver safety belt light will also beprovided and stay on for several seconds, then it will flashfor several more. You should buckle your seat belt.

3-58

This chime and light will berepeated if the driverremains unbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor thelight will be provided.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the airbag sensors, theairbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system, seeAirbag System on page 1-45.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, yourairbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have your vehicleserviced right away if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If there is a problem with the airbag system in yourvehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on theDIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-74 for more information.

3-59

Charging System Light

When you turn the engineon, this light will come onbriefly to show that thegenerator and batterycharging systemsare working properly.

If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. Youshould take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To saveyour battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-69 formore information.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided intotwo parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, youneed both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theengine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesnot release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

United States Canada

3-60

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push, or the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-36.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towedfor service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, the light will comeon when your engine isstarted and may stay onfor several seconds. Thatis normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, theremay be a problem with the antilock portion of thebrake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but you do not have antilock brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-60.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF/ACC. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop as soonas possible and turn the ignition off. Then startthe engine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you donot have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakesand there is a problem with your regular brakes. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 3-60.

3-61

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly as you start theengine, for vehiclesequipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

It will then come on only when a flat or low tire pressurecondition exists.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-60 formore information.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If the TC (traction control)warning light comes onand stays on, there may bea problem with thetraction control system.

The TC (traction control) warning light will come onbriefly when you turn the engine on. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn youif there is a problem.

The light will also come on if you turn the tractioncontrol system off using the TC (traction control) on/offbutton located on the console.

If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on orcomes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Turn your engine offand then restart it. If the light still stays on or comesback on again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the traction control system inspectedas soon as possible. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 4-8 for more information.

3-62

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warning lightwill come on when theengine is very hot.

This light will also come on briefly when the vehicleis started.

If the light does not go out or comes on and stays onwhile driving, there may be a problem with the coolingsystem. Driving with engine coolant temperature light oncould cause your vehicle to overheat, see OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-28.See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage showsthe engine coolanttemperature.

It can be used to see when your engine has warmed upand to make sure your cooling system is operatingproperly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolanttemperature warning light will come on. See EngineOverheating on page 5-26 for more information.

3-63

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after awhile, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good, and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on briefly, as a check to showyou it is working, as you start the engine. If the lightdoes not come on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emission controlsystem on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-64

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds andrestart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is stillflashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing

fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fixany mechanical or electrical problems that mayhave developed.

3-65

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CHECKENGINE light is on or not working properly.

To perform a Check Engine light bulb check with thekeyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in thepassenger compartment. See Ignition Positions onpage 2-23. Press the bottom of the ACC button onthe instrument panel and hold the button down forfive seconds. The instrument panel, including the CheckEngine light, will light up and the ignition will be on,but the engine will not start — if you press the bottom ofthe ACC button only briefly, less than five seconds,the accessory mode will be turned on, but not theignition. After the bulb check, be sure to press andrelease the ACC button again to turn the ignition off andavoid draining the vehicle’s battery.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completely

diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

3-66

This light tells you if therecould be a problem withyour engine oil pressure.

This light will come on briefly when you start yourengine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If itdoes not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it willbe there to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oilis not flowing through your engine properly. Youcould be low on oil and you might have some othersystem problem.

Security Light

For information regardingthis light, seeTheft-Deterrent System onpage 2-20.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamps light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.See Fog Lamps on page 3-37 for more information.

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the parkinglamps are on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-35 formore information.

3-67

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control is turnedoff. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and AdaptiveCruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever the high-beamheadlamps are on.

See “Smart Beam Intelligent High-Beam HeadlampControl System” under Headlamps on page 3-31 andHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9for more information.

Fuel GageThe fuel gage showsapproximately how muchfuel is in the tank. Itworks only when theengine is on.

If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low messagewill appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.Here are a few concerns some owners have had aboutthe fuel gage. All of these situations are normal anddo not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before

the gage reads full.• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly

or accelerate quickly.• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than

the gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated that the tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

3-68

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you thestatus of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC isalso used to display warning/status messages. Allmessages will appear in the DIC display located at thebottom of the instrument panel cluster, below thetachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons arelocated on the instrument panel, to the left of thesteering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a shortdelay, the DIC will display the current driver and theinformation that was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The top line of the DIC display shows the vehiclesystem information and the warning/status messages.The bottom line of the DIC display shows either theodometer, the trip odometer A or the trip odometer Binformation on the left side. Only one odometercan appear at a time. See “Trip Information” under DICControls and Displays on page 3-69 for informationon changing the display to show the odometer or tripodometer information. The bottom line of the DIC displayalso shows the outside temperature on the right sideand the shift lever position indicator in the center.See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26 formore information on the shift lever positions.

When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next tothe shift position indicator on the center of the DICdisplay. When the manual mode is active, an Mwill appear next to the shift position indicator. Whenthe normal mode is active, only the shift positionindicator will appear. See “Driver Shift Control” underAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26for more information.

If a problem is detected, a warning message will appearon the display. Be sure to take any message thatappears on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modeswhich can be accessed by pressing the four DICbuttons located on the instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

3-69

DIC Buttons (Base Level)

If your vehicle doesnot have a Head-UpDisplay (HUD), theseare the buttons foryour DIC.

«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of thisbutton to scroll through the available vehicle informationdisplays which include fuel range, fuel economy, fuelused, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tirepressure (if equipped with a tire pressure monitor),engine oil life (if equipped) and digital speed display (ifequipped). See “MPH (km)” later in this section formore information on the digital speed display.

AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top of thisbutton to scroll through the odometer, trip odometer Aand trip odometer B. Press and hold the bottom ofthis button to reset each trip odometer back to zero.

4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DIC warning messagesand clear them from the DIC display.

EM (English/Metric): Press this button to change thedisplay from English to metric.

DIC Buttons (Uplevel)If your vehicle has a HUD,these are the buttons foryour DIC.

«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of thisbutton to scroll through the available vehicle informationdisplays which include fuel range, fuel economy, fuelused, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire pressure(if equipped with a tire pressure monitor), engine oil life (ifequipped), display units and digital speed display (ifequipped). See “MPH (km)” later in this section for moreinformation on the digital speed display.

3-70

«~ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button tochange the position of the HUD on the windshield. Pressthe top part of the button to move the HUD image up.Press the bottom part of the button to move theHUD image down.

You can also adjust the brightness of the HUD image.Press in the center knob on the DIC control paneluntil the knob pops out. Then pull the knob until it stops.Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the brightness. If you turn theknob all the way counterclockwise, the HUD image willturn off. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-41for more information.

4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DICfeatures and to acknowledge DIC warning messagesand clear them from the DIC display.

3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the odometer, trip odometer A and tripodometer B. To reset each trip odometer, either pressthe reset button or press and hold the trip informationbutton until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero.

Information Display Menu ItemsThe following display menu items can be displayed bypressing the information button.

ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS (METRICDISPLAY UNITS)This display allows you to select between English andmetric units of measurement if your vehicle has theuplevel DIC. Press the reset button to switch betweenEnglish and metric units.

ENGINE OIL LIFEThis display, if equipped, shows the estimated oillife remaining. If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE onthe display, that means that 99% of the current oillife remains.When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear on the display. Youshould change your oil as soon as possible. In additionto the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-16.After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFEdisplay by pressing the reset button for three seconds.The display will show 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE afterit has been reset. Also clear the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message from the display. See Engine OilLife System on page 5-19 for more information.

3-71

TIRE PRESSUREThis display, if equipped, shows the air pressure ofeach road tire in either pounds per square inch (PSI) orkilopascals (kPa). If the tire pressure is normal, thevalue will display. If the tire pressure is low, LOW willappear on the display with the value. If the tire pressureis high, HIGH will appear on the display with thevalue. Press the information button to scroll through thefollowing displays:

RR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in thepassenger’s side rear tire.

LR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in thedriver’s side rear tire.

RF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in thepassenger’s side front tire.

LF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in thedriver’s side front tire.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of avalue, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If thisconsistently occurs, see your GM dealer for service.

BATTERY VOLTSThis display shows the current battery voltage. If thevoltage is in the normal range, the value will display. Forexample, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY VOLTS.If the voltage is low, the display will have LOW afterit. If the voltage is high, the display will have HIGH afterit. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The battery voltagemay fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.This is normal. See Charging System Light onpage 3-60 for more information.

If there is a problem with the battery charging system,the DIC may display a message. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74 for more information.

TIMER OFFThis display can be used like a stopwatch. You canrecord the time it takes to travel from one point toanother. To access the timer, press the informationbutton until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn onthe timer, press the reset button until TIMER ONdisplays. The timer will then start. To turn off the timer,press the reset button again until TIMER OFFdisplays. The timer will stop and display the end timingvalue. To reset the timer, press and hold the resetbutton after the timer has been stopped. The display willreturn to zero.

3-72

AVG MPH (AVG km/h)This display shows the average speed of the vehicle inmiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).This average is calculated based on the various vehiclespeeds recorded since the last reset of this display.To reset AVG MPH, press the reset button. The displaywill return to zero.

GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)This display shows the number of gallons or liters offuel used since the last reset of this display. Toreset GAL FUEL USED, press the reset button. Thedisplay will return to zero.

MPG INST (L/100 km INST)This display shows the current fuel economy. Thisnumber reflects only the fuel economy that the vehiclehas right now and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike average fuel economy, thisdisplay cannot be reset.

MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)This display shows the approximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or kilometers per Liter (km/L). Thisnumber is calculated based on the number of mpg(km/L) recorded since the last time this displaywas reset. To reset MPG AVG, press the reset button.The display will return to zero.

MILES RANGE (km RANGE)This display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles or kilometers you can drive withoutrefilling your fuel tank. This estimate is based onthe current driving conditions and will change if thedriving conditions change. For example, if you aredriving in traffic making frequent stops, the display mayread one number, but if you enter the freeway, thenumber may change even though you still havethe same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions produce different fueleconomies. Generally, freeway driving produces betterfuel economy than city driving.

Once the range drops below 40 miles (64 km) remaining,the display will show LOW RANGE.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Lowmessage will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information.

MPH (km)This display, if equipped, shows the vehicle’s speeddigitally in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h).

3-73

Trip Information Display Menu ItemsThe following display menu items can be displayed bypressing the trip Information button.

OdometerPress the trip information button until the odometerappears on the DIC display. The odometer shows thetotal distance the vehicle has been driven in either milesor kilometers.

Trip OdometerPress the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bappears on the DIC display. The trip odometer showsthe current distance traveled since the last reset for eachtrip odometer in either miles or kilometers. Bothodometers can be used at the same time.

For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressing and holding the bottomof the trip information button while the desired tripodometer is displayed. For uplevel vehicles, reset eachtrip odometer by pressing the reset button or bypressing and holding the trip information button whilethe desired trip odometer is displayed.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages will appear if there is a problemsensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. The textmessages are the same for both the base audio andNavigation systems unless otherwise indicated.

You must acknowledge a message to clear it from thescreen for further use. To clear a message, pressthe reset button.

Be sure to take any message that appears on thescreen seriously and remember that clearing themessage will only make the message disappear, notthe problem.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFFThis message will display when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Headlamps on page 3-31for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ONThis message will display when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Headlamps on page 3-31for more information.

3-74

BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICECHARGING SYS (System)

This symbol appears withthe BATTERY NOTCHARGING SERVICECHARGING SYSmessage.

This message will display when a problem with thecharging system has been detected. Have your vehicleserviced by your GM dealer.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message will display when the system detects thatthe battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonablelevel. The battery saver system will start reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you may not be able tonotice. At the point that the features are disabled, thismessage is displayed. It means that the vehicle is tryingto save the charge in the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the batteryto recharge.The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressingthe information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.

BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

This symbol appears withthe BATTERY VOLTAGEHIGH message.

This message will display when the electrical chargingsystem is overcharging the battery. When the systemdetects that the battery voltage is above approximately16 volts, this message will be displayed.

To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’saccessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio, set theclimate control on AUTO and the fan speed on thehighest setting, and turn the rear window defogger on.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 voltswhen the engine is running. You can monitor batteryvoltage on the DIC by pressing the information buttonuntil you find BATTERY VOLTS.

3-75

BATTERY VOLTAGE LOWThis symbol appears withthe BATTERED VOLTAGELOW message.

When this message displays, the electrical systemis charging less than 10 volts or the battery hasbeen drained.If this message appears immediately after starting theengine, it is possible that the generator can still rechargethe battery. The battery should recharge while drivingbut may take a few hours to do so. Consider usingan auxiliary charger (be sure to follow themanufacturer’s instructions) to boost the battery afterreturning home or to a final destination.If this message appears while driving or after startingyour vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediatelyto determine the cause of this problem.To help the generator recharge the battery quickly, youcan reduce the load on the electrical system byturning off the accessories.The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressingthe information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONWhen this message displays, it means that service isrequired for your vehicle. See your GM dealer. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4 for more information.

When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage by clearing it from the display, you still mustreset the engine oil life system separately. For moreinformation on resetting the engine oil life system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-19.

CHECK BRAKE FLUIDThis message will display if the ignition is on to informthe driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have thebrake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon aspossible. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-60for more information.

CHECK COOLANT LEVELThis message will display when there is a low level ofengine coolant. Have the cooling system servicedby your GM dealer as soon as possible. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23 for more information.

3-76

CHECK GAS CAPWhen this message displays, the gas cap has not beenfully tightened. You should recheck the gas cap toensure that it is on and tightened properly.

CHECK OIL LEVELThis message will display when the oil level is low. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-16 for more information onchecking your engine oil.

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

This symbol appears withthe CHECK TIREPRESSURE message.

If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitor,this message will display when one or more of thevehicle’s tires are low or high. See DIC Controls andDisplays on page 3-69 for information on checking yourvehicle’s tire pressures.

CHECK WASHER FLUID

This symbol appears withthe CHECK WASHERFLUID message.

When this message displays, it means that your vehicleis low on windshield washer fluid. You should refillthe tank as soon as possible. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 5-34 for more information.

CLEAN RADARWhen this message displays, it means that the AdaptiveCruise Control system is disabled because the radaris blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path.It may also activate during heavy rain or due to roadspray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System”under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.

3-77

DRIVER DOOR AJAR

This symbol appearswith the DRIVER DOORAJAR message.

When this message displays, it means that the driver’sdoor was not closed completely. You should makesure that the driver’s door is closed completely.

ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE

This symbol appearswith the ENGINECOOLANT HOT IDLEENGINE message.

This message will display when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down. See Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 3-63.

See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-28 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine isoverheating, severe engine damage may occur. Ifan overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-26 for more information.

ENGINE HOT – AC (AirConditioning) OFFThis message will display when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-63.To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressor is automatically turned off.When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the airconditioning compressor will turn back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have the systemrepaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to your engine.

3-78

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINEThis message will display when the engine hasoverheated. Immediately look for a safe place to pullyour vehicle over and turn the engine off right away toavoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-26 and Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-28. A chime will also soundwhen this message is displayed.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine isoverheating, severe engine damage may occur. Ifan overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-26 for more information.

ENGINE POWER REDUCEDThis message informs you that the engine power isbeing reduced to protect the engine from damage. Therecould be several malfunctions that might cause thismessage. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealeras soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This symbol appearswith the FUEL LEVELLOW message.

When this message displays, it means that your vehicleis low on fuel. You should refill the tank as soon aspossible. A single chime will sound when this messageis displayed.

HOOD AJAR

This symbol appears withthe HOOD AJAR message.

When this message displays, it means that the hoodwas not closed completely. You should make sure thatthe hood is completely closed.

3-79

ICE POSSIBLEThis message will display when the outside temperatureis cold enough to create icy road conditions.

KEY FOB BATTERY LOWWhen this message displays, it means that the batteryin your keyless access transmitter is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-4.

LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR

This symbol appears withthe LEFT REAR DOORAJAR message.

When this message displays, it means that the driver’sside rear door was not closed completely. You shouldmake sure that the door is closed completely.

NO FOBS DETECTEDWhen this message displays, it means that the vehicledoes not detect the keyless access transmitter. Thekeyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for theignition to work. Make sure you have the transmitterinside of the vehicle when using the electronic keylessignition with push-button start. See Ignition Positionson page 2-23 for more information.

NO FOB OFF OR RUN?When this message displays, it means that the keylessaccess transmitter is not detected inside of thevehicle while you are trying to turn the ignition off. Youcan either keep the car running or turn the ignitionoff while you locate your keyless access transmitter.However, if you turn the ignition off and you cannot findthe keyless access transmitter, you will not be ableto restart the vehicle. The keyless access transmitterneeds to be inside of the vehicle in order for the vehicleto start. See Starting Your Engine on page 2-24 formore information.

3-80

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINEA multiple chime will sound when this messageis displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 formore information.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engineoil pressure is low, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.

PASSENGER DOOR AJAR

This symbol appears withthe PASSENGER DOORAJAR message.

When this message displays, it means that thepassenger’s side front door was not closedcompletely. You should make sure that the door isclosed completely.

PRESS START AND BRAKE TOSTART ENGINEWhen this message displays, it means that you need topress down on the brake pedal while pressing thestart button on the electronic keyless ignition when tryingto start your vehicle. See Starting Your Engine onpage 2-24 for more information.

RADAR CRUISE NOT READYWhen this message displays, it means that the AdaptiveCruise Control system will not activate due to atemporary condition. Your vehicle does not requireservice. This message will also display when either ofthe following conditions occurs:

• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.

• The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive CruiseControl while the HUD is off.

If this message appears when you attempt to activatethe system, continue driving for several minutesand then try activating the system again.

3-81

RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR

This symbol appears withthe RIGHT REAR DOORAJAR message.

When this message displays, it means that thepassenger’s side rear door was not closed completely.You should check to make sure that the door isclosed completely.

SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message will display when the electronic sensorsthat control the air conditioning and heating systems areno longer working. Have the climate control systemserviced by your GM dealer if you notice a dropin heating and air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message will display when there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced byyour GM dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-59 for more information.

SERVICE RADAR CRUISEWhen this message displays, it means that the AdaptiveCruise Control system is disabled and needs service.See your GM dealer.

SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)Your vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called Stabilitrak®.

See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10. The SERVICESTABILITY SYS message will display if there has beena problem detected with Stabilitrak®.

If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message comes onwhile you are driving, pull off the road as soon aspossible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system byturning the ignition off then back on. If the SERVICESTABILITY SYS message still stays on or comes backon again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the Stabilitrak® System inspected by yourGM dealer as soon as possible.

3-82

SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)Your vehicle may be equipped with a speed variableassist steering system. See Steering on page 4-11.

The SERVICE STEERING SYS message will display ifa problem is detected with the speed variable assiststeering system. When this message is displayed, youmay notice that the effort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels “heavier,” but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle.

SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)This message will display when the suspensionsystem is not operating properly. Have your vehicleserviced by your GM dealer.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORThis message will display if the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system, if equipped, is not workingproperly. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealeras soon as possible.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message will display when there is a problem withthe hood open and closed switches. The switchesmay need to be replaced. When this message isdisplayed, the theft-deterrent system will still beprotecting the interior of the vehicle, however, the hoodarea will not be protected at this time. Also, theremote start function will not work when this messageappears. See your GM dealer for service.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message will display when there is a problem withthe transmission of your vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your GM dealer.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message will display when a non-emissions relatedmalfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced byyour GM dealer as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXXThis message will display when your vehicle speed islimited to XXX (mph in English mode and km/h in Metricmode) because the vehicle detects a problem in thesuspension system. Have your vehicle serviced by yourGM dealer.

3-83

STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVEThe STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will display anytime Stabilitrak® is actively assisting you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle. Slippery road conditions mayexist when this message is displayed, so adjustyour driving accordingly. This message may stay on fora few seconds after Stabilitrak® stops assisting youwith directional control of the vehicle. See Stabilitrak®

System on page 4-10 for more information.

STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READYThe STABILITY SYS NOT READY message willdisplay if Stabilitrak® is not ready. Two conditions maycause this message to display.

The first condition may be that the vehicle needs to bedriven in a straight line for approximately 30-40 ft(9-12 m) until the sensors are centered. Once thesensors are centered, the Stabilitrak® system will beready and the STABILITY SYS READY messagewill display.

The second condition that may cause this message todisplay is when you first start your vehicle and driveaway during cold winter weather. This is normal.The system needs to warm up. You can acknowledgethis message by pressing the reset button.

The Stabilitrak® performance is affected until theSTABILITY SYS READY message is displayed inthe DIC. See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10 formore information.

STABILITY SYS (System) OFFThe STABILITY SYS OFF message will display anytime you turn off Stabilitrak® using the TC (tractioncontrol) on/off button. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-8 for more information. Whenthis message has been displayed, Stabilitrak® is nolonger available to assist you with directional control ofthe vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeStabilitrak® System on page 4-10 for more information.

STABILITY SYS (System) READYThe STABILITY SYS READY message will display anytime you turn back on Stabilitrak® using the TC(traction control) on/off button. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8 for more information. Whenthis message has been displayed, Stabilitrak® isready to assist you with directional control of the vehicleif needed. See Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10for more information.

3-84

STARTING DISABLED THEFTPROBLEMThis message will display when incorrect conditionsexist within the theft-deterrent system. See yourGM dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLED THROTTLEPROBLEMThis message will display when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have your vehicleserviced by your GM dealer.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This symbol appearswith the THEFTATTEMPTED message.

This message will display if the theft-deterrent systemhas detected a break-in attempt while you wereaway from your vehicle.

TRACTION ACTIVEThis message will display when the traction controlsystem is actively limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if this message is displayed,so adjust your driving accordingly. The message willstay on for a few seconds after the traction controlsystem stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8 for more information.

TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLEENGINEThis message will display when the transmission fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow itto idle until the transmission cools down or untilthis message is removed.

TRUNK OPENThis symbol appearswith the TRUNKOPEN message.

When this message displays, it means that the trunkwas not closed completely. You should make sure thatthe trunk is closed completely.

3-85

TURN SIGNAL ONIf you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will displayas a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiplechime will sound when this message is displayed.

Other MessagesHere are more messages that you can receive on yourDriver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge amessage and read another message that may havecome on at the same time, press the reset button.

• ACCESSORY ACTIVE

(See Ignition Positions on page 2-23.)

• KNOWN FOB

(See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”under Keyless Access System Operation onpage 2-4.)

• MAX # FOBS LEARNED


• OFF/ACC TO LEARN


• READY FOR FOB X


• SHIFT TO PARK

(See Starting Your Engine on page 2-24.)

• WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)


3-86

Audio System(s)Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it canbe added by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can be added,it is very important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the operation of sound equipmentthat has been added improperly.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, findout what your audio system can do, and how to operateall of its controls.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can beplayed even after the ignition is turned off. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24for more information.

Setting the Time1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to enter

the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET CLOCKappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select SET CLOCK.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the time.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update thetime. VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear onthe display.

If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of theconfigurable keys, pressing the key will switch thedisplay back to the clock set function. The time and datewill always appear on the radio display. See“Configurable Radio Display Keys” under Radio withCD on page 3-88 for more information on configuringthe keys.

3-87

Setting the Date1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to enter

the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET DATE appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select SET DATE.

4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the date.

5. Press the tune/select knob to update thetime. VEHICLE DATE UPDATED will appearon the display.

If the DATE is configured into one of the configurablekeys, pressing the key will switch the display back to thedate set function. The time and date will alwaysappear on the radio display. See “Configurable RadioDisplay Keys” under Radio with CD on page 3-88for more information on configuring the keys.

Radio with CD

Radio with CD shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD similar

3-88

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast tocoast channels including music, news, sports, talk,and children’s programming. XM™ provides digitalquality audio and text information, including song titleand artist name. A service fee is required in orderto receive the XM™ service. For more information,contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

4 (Information): Press this button while in XM mode toretrieve three different categories of informationrelated to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,Category or PTY. To view this information, performthe following:

1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO appears onthe display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.The display will change to show the additionalXM information.

4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. Toreturn to the original display, repeatedly press theBACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.

3-89

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.

n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select thesource and to play. CD will appear on the display if aCD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display will notchange from the radio source.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, or XM1or XM2 (if equipped).

w (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

©¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button to goto the previous station and stay there. Press theright single arrow button to go to the next station andstay there. The sound will mute while seeking.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow scan button toenter scan mode. SCAN will appear on the display.Press this button to scan to the next station. Theradio will go to a station, play for 5 seconds, then goon to the next station. Press this button again tostop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold the doublearrow scan button for more than two seconds until youhear a beep and PSCAN appears on the display.The radio will go to the first preset station, play for5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Pressthis button again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you canset the radio to search for local stations or stations thatare further away for a larger selection. To set this featureto LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until SEEK LOCAL orSEEK DISTANT appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select either LOCALor DISTANT.

3-90


To search for stations, press the single arrow buttons. Ifthe system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear on thedisplay and seek to stations with strong signalsonly. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK willappear on the display and seek to stations with weakand strong signals.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmedon the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for two seconds until you hear a beep.The set preset station number will appear on thedisplay above the pushbutton that it is set to.Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed forless than two seconds, the station that was setwill return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.To set the preset stations with an equalizationsetting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each ofthese features later in this section. When apreset station is selected, once one of theseadditional settings is selected, the preset station willremember each setting and it will remain active,until the setting is selected off for that preset station.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stationsautomatically, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.


4. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTOSTOREPRESETS appears on the display.

5. Press the tune/select knob to select. AUTOSTOREwill appear on the display. The radio willautomatically search the band and select and storethe six radio stations with the strongest signal.The stations will be stored by signal strength, notsequential order. The set preset station number willappear on the display above the pushbutton thatit is set to. Whenever that numbered pushbutton ispressed for less than two seconds, the stationthat was set will return.

3-91


When battery power is removed and later applied, youwill not have to reset your radio presets.

PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you theability to store two different kinds of station presets.HOME can be used for stations available where you liveand AWAY can be for stations available outside ofyour local broadcasting area. To set preset stations forhome and away perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until PRESETSHOME/AWAY appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select. HOME orAWAY will appear on the display.


Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listedfor setting the preset pushbuttons for both homeand away.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until BASS-MID-TREBLEappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter thetone settings.

4. Press the tune/select knob to scroll throughthe settings.

5. Turn the tune/select knob to increase or to decreasethe bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak ornoisy, decrease the treble.

6. Press the tune/select knob to set the adjustment.

7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.To return to the original display repeatedly pressthe BACK (F6) button or wait for the display totime out.

3-92

AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to selectcustomized equalization settings. To choose anequalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until EQUALIZERappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to set the equalizationsetting. The equalization setting will appear onthe display.


The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),and EQ5 (Country).

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)To adjust the balance or fade, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until BASS-MID-TREBLEappears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter thetone settings.

4. Press the tune/select knob to scroll to BALANCEor FADER.

5. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the BALANCEto the right or the left speakers and the FADER tothe front or the rear speakers.

6. Press the tune/select knob to set the adjustment.

7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.To return to the original display, repeatedly pressthe BACK (F6) button or wait for the display totime out.

EQ0 will not appear on the display when in this mode.

RDS Messages

ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.When, an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station or a related network station, ALERTwill appear on the display. You will hear theannouncement, even if the volume is low or a CD isplaying. If a CD is playing, play will stop duringthe announcement. Alert announcements cannot beturned off. If the radio tunes to a related network stationfor the announcement, it will return to the originalstation when the announcement is finished.

ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

3-93

MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has amessage, MSG will appear on the display. The messagemay display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,etc. If the entire message does not appear on thedisplay, parts of the message will appear everythree seconds until the message is completed. Once thecompleted message has been displayed, MSG willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received.

To display the last message, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until RECALL RDSMESSAGE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob. The message willappear on the display.

Once the message has been displayed, MSG willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received.

TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the displaywhen the radio detects a signal from an RDS station thathas traffic announcement broadcast capability.

TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on thedisplay, the tuned radio station broadcasts trafficannouncements and when a traffic announcementcomes on the tuned station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,when TA is turned on it will seek to a station thatdoes. When a station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radio will stop seeking andTA will appear on the display. If no station is foundthat broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic willappear on the display.

The radio will play traffic announcements if the volumeis low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if thelast tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.

To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until TRAFFICANNOUNCE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON orOFF. An X will appear in the box when TA isselected on.


3-94

Activating Program Type (PTY)Stations (RDS and XM™)PTY allows you to search for stations with specific typesof music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY,TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.

To activate program types, perform thefollowing steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until PROGRAM TYPEMODE appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON orOFF. An X will appear in the box when PTYis selected on.


Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear onthe display above the pushbuttons, in place of thepreset stations (if programmed). Press the pushbuttonfor the PTY that you would like to listen to. Not allstations support PTYs. The radio may not go to allof the stations with that music type when pressingthe pushbutton.

AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allowsthe radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type.

To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until ALTERNATEFREQ. appears on the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select AF OFF,AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the boxwhen AF is selected on.


Radio Message

THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has been activated. Takethe vehicle to the dealer for service.

3-95

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (ExplicitLanguage Channels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updatingencryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

3-96

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display

Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourGM dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-97

Using the Single CD PlayerInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on, theCD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radiooff, but it will not start playing until the radio is on.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display.As each new track starts to play, the track numberwill appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur, try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

When a CD is inserted, the CD functions will appear onthe display above the pushbuttons, in place of thepreset stations (if programmed).

F1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go tothe previous track. Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Release the pushbuttonto play the passage. The elapsed time of the track willappear on the display.

F2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quicklywithin a track. Release the pushbutton to play thepassage. The elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM againto turn off random play. RANDOM will disappearfrom the display.

F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a trackover again. REPEAT will appear on the display. PressRPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT willdisappear from the display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display thetime of the track. Press this pushbutton again toremove the time of the track from the display.

3-98

©¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button to goto the previous or press the right single arrow buttonto go to the next track on the CD.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button to listento each track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to atrack, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.Press this button again to stop scanning.


Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with the ignition and the radio off.

Using the Six-Disc CD ChangerThe CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.



When a CD is inserted, the CD functions will appear onthe display above the pushbuttons, in place of thepreset stations (if programmed).

M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the CDplayer. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and release the load button. Please Wait willappear on the display.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on thedisplay, insert a CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.

When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,the number of the CD and the track number willappear on the display if the radio is on.

If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.

3-99

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.

2. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.Please Wait will appear on the display and youwill hear a beep.

3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on thedisplay, insert a CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on thedisplay. The CD player will take up to six CDs. Donot try to load more than six. If you want to loadless than six CDs, load the desired amount. The CDplayer will time out when it does not receive anymore CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play.

If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to playautomatically.

F1 CDn(Down): Press this pushbutton to go to theprevious CD.

F2 CDm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go to thenext CD.

F3 CD REV{ (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to goto the previous track. Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within the track. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time ofthe track will appear on the display.

F4 CD FWD| (Forward): Press this pushbutton togo to the next track. Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within the track. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time ofthe track will appear on the display.

F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select fromNORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD (RepeatCD), RDM TRK (Random Track), and RDM ALL(Random All CDs).

• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of theCD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the displaywhen in this mode.

• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track overagain. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Pressthe MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeatplay. RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.

• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.RPT DISC will appear on the display. Press theMODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play. RPTDISC will disappear from the display.

• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks onthe current CD in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM TRK will appear on the display.Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. RDM TRK will disappear fromthe display.

3-100

• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDsloaded in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM ALL will appear on the display. Pressthe MODE pushbutton again to turn off randomplay. RDM ALL will disappear from the display.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display thetime of the track. Press this pushbutton again todisplay CD PLAY MODE.

©¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button to goto the previous or press the right single arrow buttonto go to the next track on the CD.

©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow button to listento each track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to atrack, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.Press this button again to stop scanning.


Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that iscurrently playing, or press and hold this button toeject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep. Ejectmay be activated with the ignition or radio off.

Using an MP3 CDMP3 FormatThis MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recordedon an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs,112 kpbs, 128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs,256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title,artist name, and album will be available when recordedusing ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.

The player will be able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of alarge number of files and folders or playlists maycause the player to be unable to play up to themaximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CDthat was recorded using no file folders. The system cansupport up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep thedepth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep downthe complexity and confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback. If a CD contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you accessand navigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum will be ignored.

3-101

Root DirectoryThe root directory will be treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directorywill be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory will be accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will alwaysbe accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in thefile structure that contains only folders/subfolders and nocompressed files directly beneath them, the player willadvance to the next folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files and the empty folderwill not be displayed or numbered.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, the fileswill be located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder functions will have no function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder the radio willdisplay ROOT.When the CD contains only playlists and compressedaudio files, but no folders, all files will be located underthe root folder. The folder down and the folder upbuttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to theroot folder. When the radio displays the name of thefolder the radio will display ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks will be played in the following order:

• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlistand will continue sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas been played, play will continue from the firsttrack of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then playwill begin from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the root directoryhave been played, play will continue from filesaccording to their numerical listing. After playing thelast track from the last folder, play will beginagain at the first track of the first folder orroot directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display will notautomatically show the new folder name. The new trackname will appear on the display.

File System and NamingThe song name that will be displayed will be the songname that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song nameis not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio willdisplay the file name without the extension (such as.mp3) as the track name.

3-102

Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages willbe shortened. The display will not show parts ofwords on the last page of text and the extension of thefilename will not be displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists which werecreated by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or RealJukebox™ software, however, you will not have editingcapability. These playlists will be treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in, and LOADING CD will appear on thedisplay. The CD should begin playing and the CDsymbol will appear on the display. If the ignition and theradio are on, the CD will begin playing. A CD may beloaded with the radio off, but it will not start playing untilthe radio is on.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur, try aknown good CD.



F1r (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the previous folder.

Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly withina track. Release this pushbutton to play the passage.REV and the elapsed time of the track will appear onthe display.

Pressing this button while in folder random mode willtake you to the previous folder and random the tracks inthat folder.

3-103

F2[ (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go tothe first track in the next folder.

Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quicklywithin a track. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the track willappear on the display.

Pressing this button while in folder random mode willtake you to the next folder and random the tracks inthat folder.

F3 RDM (Random): To play the tracks on the CD inrandom, rather than sequential order, press and releasethis pushbutton until RDM TRCK appears on thedisplay. Once all of the tracks in the current folder orplaylist have been played, the system will move onto the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks inrandom order.

To play the tracks in the current folder in random, ratherthan sequential order, press and release this pushbuttonuntil RDM FLDR appears on the display. This featurewill not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eithersingle seek arrow will take you to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton until NORMALappears on the display to turn random play off.

F4 RPT (Repeat): To repeat the current track, pressand release this pushbutton until RPT TRCK appears onthe display.

To repeat the tracks in the current folder, press andrelease this pushbutton until RPT FLDR appears onthe display.

Press and release this pushbutton until NORMALappears on the display to turn repeated play off.

F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to switchbetween the elapsed time of the track and the MP3playback information.

©¨ (Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe previous track. Press the right arrow to go to thestart of the next track. Pressing either arrow formore than two seconds will search the previous or nexttracks at two tracks per second. Release the buttonto stop searching and to play the track.

©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button to scanthe tracks in each folder. The radio will go to thenext track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the nexttrack. Press this button again to stop scanning.

3-104

w (Tune): Turning the tune knob will fast trackreverse or advance through the tracks in all folders orplaylists. The track number and file name will appear onthe display for each track. Turning this knob while inrandom will fast track reverse or advance the tracks insequential order.

4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3 CD isloaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album, or Foldernames. To view this information, perform the following:

1. Press the tune/select knob to enter themain menu.

2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO appears onthe display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO.The display will change to show the additionalMP3 information.

4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to view thatspecific information.

• F1 TTLE (Title): To display the title name.

• F2 ATST (Artist): To display the artist name.

• F3 ALBM (Album): To display the album name.

• F4 FLDR (Folder): To display the folder name.



Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with the ignition and the radio off.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• If you are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

3-105

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it toyour GM dealer when reporting the problem.

Configurable Radio Display KeysThis feature allows you to customize the four keys thatare located on each side of the radio display tomake it easier to adjust the radio features andother non-radio related features are also availablefor customization.

To program the configurable radio display keys, performthe following steps:


2. Turn the tune/select knob until SETUP appearson the display.

3. Press the tune/select knob to enter into SETUP.

4. Turn the tune/select knob until CONFIGUREDISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.

5. Press the tune/select knob to enter intoCONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.

6. Turn the tune/select knob to select which of the fourconfigurable keys you would like to change. Thecurrently assigned feature will be shown.

7. Press the tune/select knob to select the configurablekey to change.

8. Turn the tune/select knob to find the feature thatyou would like to store to the key.

9. Press the tune/select knob when you have foundthe feature to be stored. The display will update,by showing the symbol of the feature that youselected next to the configurable key.

10. Repeat the previous steps for eachconfigurable key.

Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature willnot appear on the display when programming theremaining configurable keys. The configurable keys canbe changed at any time.

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system thatincludes Radio Data System (RDS) with ProgramType (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind ofmusic you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite RadioService capabilities (if equipped). The radio canalso communicate with the navigation system tobroadcast announcements on traffic, weather, andemergency alert communications. For informationon how to use this system, see the “NavigationSystem” manual.

3-106

Radio Personalization

Accessing the Radio’s Main Menu(Base Audio System)There are two different procedures for accessing theradio’s main menu depending upon whether or not yourvehicle has the Navigation system.

To access the main menu of the radio, do one ofthe following:

• Using the Base audio system, press the CNFGbutton located on the radio or press the tune/selectknob located on the right side of the radio. Thenturn the tune/select knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to scroll through the menu items.

• If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see theNavigation System manual supplied with yourvehicle for more information on accessing the mainmenu and for descriptions of the menu items forthe Navigation system.

The main menu for the Base audio system consists ofthe following menu items:

• e BASS - MID - TREBLE

• x BALANCE - FADER

• e EQ EQUALIZER

• H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS

• AUTOSTORE PRESETS

• CAT CATEGORY

• TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE

• RECALL RDS (Radio Data System) MESSAGE

• AF ALTERNATE FREQ. (Frequency)

• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT

• 8 SET CLOCK

• B SET DATE

• 4 INFO (Information)

• LANG LANGUAGE

• SETUP

3-107

Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions(Base Audio System)The following descriptions are for the Base audiosystem. For information pertaining to the Navigationaudio system, see “Audio System” in the Index ofthe Navigation System manual supplied withyour vehicle.

e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This menuitem allows you to adjust the levels for the bass,midrange and treble features of the audio system. See“Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)” under Radio withCD on page 3-88 for more information.

x BALANCE - FADER: This menu item allows you toadjust the levels for the balance and fader featuresof the audio system. See “Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)” under Radio with CD on page 3-88 formore information.

e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you tochoose among five preset equalizations for the audiosystem. See “Audio Equalizer” under Radio with CD onpage 3-88 for more information.

H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This menu item allowsyou to switch back and forth between your homeand away preset radio stations. See “PresetsHome/Away” under Radio with CD on page 3-88 formore information.

AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows you toautomatically store radio stations with the strongestsignals as presets. See “Autostore Presets” under Radiowith CD on page 3-88 for more information.

CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to selectradio stations based on preset categories. See“Activating Program Type (PTY) Stations” under Radiowith CD on page 3-88 for more information.

TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allowsyou to turn the TA feature on and off. See “TA(Traffic Announcement)” under Radio with CD onpage 3-88 for more information.

RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This menu item allows youto view an RDS radio station message broadcast bya radio station. See “MSG (Message)” under Radio withCD on page 3-88 for more information.

AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows youto turn the AF feature on and off. See “ActivatingProgram Type (PTY) Stations (RDS and XM™)” underRadio with CD on page 3-88 for more information.

3-108

ASEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs theaudio system to seek only local radio stations withthe strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with astrong signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you arein urban areas where there are several strong radiostation signals and you want to limit the numberof stations to those with the strongest signals only. UseDISTANT when you are in rural areas where thereare fewer radio station signals available.

See “Local/Distant Selection” under Radio with CD onpage 3-88 for more information.

8 SET CLOCK: Use this menu item to set the time.

See Setting the Time on page 3-87 for more information.

B SET DATE: Use this menu item to set the date.

See Setting the Time on page 3-87 for more information.

4 (Information): This menu item is used to displayXM™ satellite radio service and CD MP3 playbackinformation. See “4 (Information)” under Radio withCD on page 3-88 for more information.

LANG (Language): To change the language displayedon the radio, select LANGUAGE by pressing thetune/select knob. Turn the tune/select knob to scrollthrough the following available languages:

• ENGLISH

• GERMAN

• FRENCH

• SPANISH

• JAPANESE

To make your selection, press the tune/select knob. Ifyou accidentally select a language that you did not want,ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.

SETUP: When you select this menu item, the followingsubmenu is available:

• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU

• DRIVER SELECTION

• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS

• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS

3-109

SETUP Submenu ItemsThe following choices are available for programmingusing the Base audio system.

PERSONAL SETTINGS MENUThis item turns the entire list of personalization featureson or off. This item allows you to program certainfeatures to a preferred setting for up to two people. Thenumber of available features varies depending uponwhich options are purchased. When this item ison, a check mark will appear after it. For moreinformation on the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item,see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-47.

DRIVER SELECTIONWhen you select this item, the followingsubmenu appears:

• DRIVER 1

• DRIVER 2

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS

For more information on the DRIVER SELECTIONsubmenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-64.

DRIVER EXIT SETTINGSWhen you select this item, the followingsubmenu appears:• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS• STORE EXIT SETTINGS

For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGSsubmenu item, see “Recalling Exit Settings” and“Storing Exit Settings” under Memory Seat, Mirrors andSteering Wheel on page 2-64.

CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS(Base Audio System)This item allows you to customize the functions of thefour configurable keys located to the left and right ofthe audio display. See “Configurable Radio DisplayKeys” under Radio with CD on page 3-88 forprogramming information.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourvehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically bylearning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, itwill not operate. If the radio is removed from yourvehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used totrace the radio back to your vehicle.With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

3-110

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

The audio steering wheel controls may be differentdepending on your vehicles options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

> (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turnthe sound on.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), radio,or CD.

g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle hasthe Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD audiosystem, press this button to interact with the OnStar®

system. See the OnStar® manual provided withyour vehicle for more information.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, press thisbutton to initiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the Navigation System manual for moreinformation. You may be able to interact with theOnStar® system using this button. See the OnStar®

manual provided with your vehicle for more information.

1–6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stationswith a strong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press this button to go to thenext track.

3-111

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to go to the next available CD, if multipleCDs are loaded.

+u — (Volume): Press this button to increase or todecrease the volume.

+tu — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to thenext or the previous radio station and stay there.The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go to thestart of the current track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press the plus sign to go to the next track.If either the minus or the plus button are pressedmore than once, the player will continue movingbackward or forward through the CD.

Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button, untilyou hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or fastreverse through the CD. Press either button again toplay the passage.

If you have the navigation system, some of the audiosteering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing inthe navigation radio. See the Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Staticcan occur on AM stations caused by things likestorms and power lines. Try reducing the treble toreduce this noise.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals willreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

3-112

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio maydisplay NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may cause interference with yourvehicle’s radio. This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’sbattery, or simply having the phone on. This interferenceis an increased level of static while listening to theradio. If static is received while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edgesor the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-113

Diversity Antenna SystemThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear windowdefogger, located in the rear window. Make sure thatthe inside surface of the rear window is not scratchedand that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. Ifthe inside surface is damaged, it could interfere withradio reception.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other materialfrom the inside of the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade or anything else that issharp. This may damage the rear window defoggergrid and affect your radio’s ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rear windowdefogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger gridline has been damaged. If this is true, the grid linemust be repaired.

If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to theglass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FMantennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellulartelephone antenna does not touch a grid line.

XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna SystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.

3-114

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-5Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8Magnetic Ride Control .....................................4-9Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-9Stabilitrak® System .......................................4-10Panic Brake Assist ........................................4-10Steering ......................................................4-11Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-15

Driving at Night ............................................4-16Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17City Driving ..................................................4-20Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24Winter Driving ..............................................4-26If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow .....4-30Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-31Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31

Towing ..........................................................4-36Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-36Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-36Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-7.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake orturn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,

reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makesproper defensive driving more difficult and can evencause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drivea vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some othercountries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is0.05 percent in both France and Germany. TheBAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United Statesis 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol inone drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able toreact quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord, or heart. This means that when anyone who hasbeen drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

4-4

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work at the places where the tires meetthe road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-8.

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

4-5

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice that yourbrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-61.

4-6

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

4-7

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hearthe anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel thebrake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses that one or both of the rearwheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. Onan All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle the system willoperate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

This warning light willcome on to let you knowif there’s a problemwith your tractioncontrol system.

See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light onpage 3-62. When this warning light is on, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery road conditions, you shouldalways leave the system on. But you can turn thetraction control system off if you ever need to.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerateheavily when the TCS is off. You could damage yourvehicle’s driveline.

When the TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, youmay still feel the system working. This is normaland necessary with the AWD hardware on your vehicle.

4-8

You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicleis required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 4-31 and If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor Snow on page 4-30 for more information. See alsoWinter Driving on page 4-26 for information on usingTCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.

To turn the system off,press the TC (tractioncontrol) button locatednear the shift lever.

If you press the TC button once, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the traction control systemwarning light will come on. Press the TC button again toturn the system back on. If you press and hold theTC button for five seconds, the Stabilitrak® system andthe traction control system will turn off. Press theTC button again to turn Stabilitrak® back on. For moreinformation, see Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10.

Magnetic Ride ControlYour vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control thatautomatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automaticride control is achieved through a computer used tocontrol and monitor the suspension system. Thecontroller receives input from various sensors todetermine the proper system response. If the controllerdetects a problem within the system, the DIC willdisplay a Service Suspension System message. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information. See your dealer for service.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleYour limited-slip rear axle can give you additionaltraction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It workslike a standard axle most of the time, but when oneof the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with traction to movethe vehicle.

4-9

Stabilitrak ® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called Stabilitrak®. It is anadvanced computer controlled system that assists youwith directional control of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

Stabilitrak® activates when the computer senses adiscrepancy between your intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actually traveling. Stabilitrak®

selectively applies braking pressure at any one ofthe vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in thedirection which you are steering.

When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS ACTIVEmessage will be displayed on the Driver InformationCenter. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74.You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in thebrake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the direction you want it to go.

If there is a problem detected with Stabilitrak®, aSERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74. When this message isdisplayed, the system is not operational. Driving shouldbe adjusted accordingly.

Stabilitrak® comes on automatically whenever you startyour vehicle. To help assist you with directionalcontrol of the vehicle, you should always leave thesystem on. You can turn Stabilitrak® off if you ever needto through the TC (traction control) on/off button. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Stabilitrak®

activates, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may reengage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 3-16 for more information.

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle has a panic brake assist system thatmonitors the intention of the driver while braking. If thesystem senses that the driver has applied hard/fastpressure to the brake pedal, the system will generateadditional pressure, making it easier for the driverto maintain brake application. When this happens thebrake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let the system work for you.You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise but this is normal. The brakes will returnto normal operation after the brake pedal hasbeen released.

4-10

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Speed Variable Assist SteeringYour vehicle has a steering system that continuouslyadjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehiclespeeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solidfeel at highway speeds.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Adding thesudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.

Since your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak® you maysee the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on theDriver Information Center. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-74.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

4-11

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

To help you steer in the direction you want to go, duringcertain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gearselection is controlled. This will maximize the availabledrive wheel torque and minimize the transmissionresponse time and shift activity. During this kind ofmaneuver, the transmission shifts automaticallyas vehicle speed changes.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the timefor evasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou’re driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it is allright to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-13

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For onething, following too closely reduces your area ofvision, especially if you are following a largervehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space ifthe vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddo not get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move intothe other lane. If the way is clear to pass, youwill have a running start that more than makes upfor the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

4-14

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If your traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is also best handledby easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

With Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY SYSACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including engine braking by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-15

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

4-16

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare, as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires do not have much treadleft, you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly whenyour reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-17

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before youhit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-18

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, andraindrops dimple the water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low water crossing,your vehicle can be carried away. As little assix inches of flowing water can carry away asmaller vehicle. If this happens, you and othervehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-51.

4-19

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-20

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also calledthruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes,or superhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

4-21

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your sense ofmotion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower than youactually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course, youwill find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They will be readyand willing to help if you need it.

4-22

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

4-23

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,and transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

4-24

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea, or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Also see Tires on page 5-51.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

4-26

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

But wet ice can be even more trouble because it mayoffer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it isabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

Traction control improves your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even though your vehiclehas a traction control system, you will want to slow downand adjust your driving to the road conditions. Undercertain conditions, you may want to turn the tractioncontrol system off, such as when driving through deepsnow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-8, Stabilitrak® System on page 4-10,Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-31,and “Winter Tires” under Tires on page 5-51.

4-27

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-6.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

4-28

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-29

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or sountil help comes.

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as rockingcan help you get out when you are stuck, but youmust use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they canexplode, and you or others could be injured.And, the transmission or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For more information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-70.

4-30

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. Thatwill clear the area around your front wheels. Turn yourtraction control system off; see Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. Release the acceleratorpedal while you shift, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowlyspinning your wheels in the forward and reversedirections, you will cause a rocking motion that may freeyour vehicle. If that does not get you out after a fewtries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need tobe towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-36.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-31

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label isattached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver’s door open, you will find the label attachedbelow the door lock post (striker). The tire andloading information label shows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-51and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

Label Example

4-32

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-38 for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

4-33




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers, and cargo shouldnever exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-34

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to therear edge of the driver’s door, and tells you thegross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargoand tongue weight, if pulling a trailer. The Certificationlabel also tells you the maximum weights for thefront and rear axles, called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help youwith this. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, orthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) inyour trunk.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-35

If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In atrunk, put them as far forward as you can.Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

Automatic Level ControlThis feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as theload changes. It is automatic, you do not need toadjust anything.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Service on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

4-36

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, youwill want to make sure your vehicle is prepared tobe towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Tripon page 4-22.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all fourwheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,you should use a dolly. See Dolly Towing later inthis section for more information.

Dolly Towing

If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towedusing a dolly. If you have an All-Wheel Drive (AWD)vehicle, it can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead

position with a clamping device designed for towing.5. Release the parking brake.

4-37

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify whatthe vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, andit has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read this section carefullybefore you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced towork harder against the drag of the added weight.The engine is required to operate at relatively higherspeeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.What is more, the trailer adds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

4-38

If You Do Decide To Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you will be driving. A good sourcefor this information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at full throttle. Thishelps your engine and other parts of your vehiclewear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Do not drive faster than the maximum postedspeed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? It should neverweigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). These are totalmaximum weights including the load. But even that canbe too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

The maximum trailer weight for your vehicle can bedetermined from the Gross Combined Vehicle Weight(GCVW). The GCVW = curb weight + passenger’sweight + cargo weight + trailer weight. The GCVWshould never be more than 7,200 lbs (3 273 kg).

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-39

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31 for more information about yourvehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, you may be able to get them rightsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tireand Loading Information. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-31. Then be sure you do not go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of thetrailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for

hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body of yourvehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, thenbe sure to seal the holes later when you remove thehitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into yourvehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33. Dirt andwater can, too.

4-40

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesBecause you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tapinto your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If youdo, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. Ifyou tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer brakes.Be sure to follow the instructions that come with thetrailer or from the brake manufacturer.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you will be able to maintain them properly.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you will want toget to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

4-41

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up ahead whenyou are towing a trailer. And, because you are agood deal longer, you will need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer will not strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Checkwith your dealer. The arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lanechange. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. Itis important to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

4-42

Driving on GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

Climbing grades steeper than four percent attemperatures above 90°F (32°C) with a loaded vehicleand trailer is not recommended. The cooling systemmay temporarily overheat. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here ishow to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P). When parking uphill, turn the wheelsaway from the curb. When parking downhill, turn thewheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift intoPARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-43

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you arepulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule formore on this. Things that are especially important intrailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (do notoverfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system andbrake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,and the Index will help you find them quickly. If youare trailering, it is a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.

4-44

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-16Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22Engine Coolant .............................................5-23Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26Engine Overheating .......................................5-26Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................5-28Cooling System ............................................5-29Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-33

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-34Brakes ........................................................5-35Battery ........................................................5-38Jump Starting ...............................................5-39

All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-44Rear Axle .......................................................5-45Front Axle ......................................................5-46Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-47Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47Front Turn Signal Lamps ...............................5-48Sidemarker Lamps ........................................5-48Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-49

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-50Tires ..............................................................5-51

Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-52Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-60Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-63When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-65Buying New Tires .........................................5-65Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-67Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-68Wheel Replacement ......................................5-68

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Chains ..................................................5-70If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-71Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-72Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-73Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-75Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-81Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-82

Appearance Care ............................................5-82Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-83Vinyl ...........................................................5-84Leather .......................................................5-85Instrument Panel ..........................................5-85Interior Plastic Components ............................5-85Wood Panels ...............................................5-85Speaker Covers ............................................5-85Glass Surfaces .............................................5-85Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-86Weatherstrips ...............................................5-86Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-86Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-86Finish Care ..................................................5-87

Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-87Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................5-88Tires ...........................................................5-88Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-89Finish Damage .............................................5-89Underbody Maintenance ................................5-89Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-89Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-90

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-91Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-91Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-91

Electrical System ............................................5-92Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-92Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-92Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-92Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-93Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-93Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-94Rear Underseat Fuse Block ...........................5-97

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-104

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, use regularunleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.However, for best performance and for trailer towing,you may wish to use middle grade or premium unleadedgasoline. If the octane is less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.

If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine, use premiumunleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 91 or higherfor best performance. You may also use middlegrade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightlyreduced. If the octane is less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by automobile manufacturersaround the world and contained in the World-WideFuel Charter which is available from theAlliance of Automobile Manufacturers atwww.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

5-5

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-64. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. General Motorsrecommends that you buy gasolines that are advertisedto help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If yourvehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GMdealer has additives that will help correct and preventmost deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available inyour area to contribute to clean air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines, particularly ifthey comply with the specifications described earlier.

5-6

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motorsdoes not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system may beaffected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling your vehicle — thisis against the law in some places. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel capis located behind ahinged fuel door on thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle.

To open the fuel door, press on the rear edge of thefuel door and it will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back tothe right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

5-8

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noiseto stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank, and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuelfrom painted surfaces as soon as possible. SeeWashing Your Vehicle on page 5-86.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fullyinstalled. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed. Thiswould allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-64.

The Check Gas Cap message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is notreinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-74 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-64.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release lever inside the vehicle.It is located on the lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find thesecondary hood release lever. The lever islocated under the front edge of the grille near thecenter. Move the release lever to the side and raisethe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview

3.6L V6 Engine

5-12

Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields, which surround the vehicle’sengine cover. These sight shields need to be removed in order to access some of the underhood componentsin your vehicle.

To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners on each side to the left until they pop out. Then remove thefasteners and lift the shields up and away from the shock towers that support them.

After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-94.

B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-34.

C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger

Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 5-33.F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “CheckingEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-35.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-26and Cooling System on page 5-29.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

5-13

4.6L V8 Engine

5-14

After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Blockon page 5-94.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-38.C. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger

Compartment Air Filter on page 3-54.D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding

Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-34.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-33.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “CheckingEngine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-35.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. SeeCoolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-26and Cooling System on page 5-29.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21.

If your vehicle is equipped with front compartmentunderhood sight shields, before closing the hood be sureto replace the sight shields. To replace the shields,locate the ribs on the underside of each shield and guidethe ribs on to the supporting shock towers. Theninsert the fasteners into the top of the shield and pushthe fasteners back into place.

5-15

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

3.6L V6 Engine

4.6L V8 Engine

5-16

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of thedipstick, then you will need to add at least one quart of oil.But you must use the right kind. This section explainswhat kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-104.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engine oil fill cap.Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for two things:

• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meetingGM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic. However,not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.You should look for and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM4718M.

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.

3.6L V6 Engine 4.6L V8 Engine

5-17

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements should alsohave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM4718M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with aMobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirementsfor your vehicle.

5-18

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718Mmay not be available. You can add substitute oildesignated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbolat all temperatures. If temperatures are above0°F (−18°C), you may substitute SAE 10W-30 withthe starburst symbol. Substitute oil not meetingGM Standard GM4718M should not be used foran oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meet GM StandardGM4718M are all you will need for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change will be indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life system to work properly, youmust reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message inthe DIC will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-74. Change your oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,if you are driving under the best conditions, the oillife system may not indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealer hasGM-trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check your oil regularly and keep itat the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-19

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DICbeing turned on, reset the system.

After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message must be reset. To reset themessage use the following procedure:

1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC toshow OIL LIFE.

2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item ishighlighted, press and hold the RESET button untilthe percentage shows 100%.If the percentage does not return to 100% or if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comesback on when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it inthe trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking itto a place that collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, aservice station or a local recycling center for help.

5-20

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, nearthe front. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on locating andaccessing the air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change after50,000 miles (83 000 km).See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for moreinformaiton. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws located on the topof the cover.

2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so thatit is not going across the top of the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from thepassenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at thebottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top ofthe airbox cover toward the engine.

4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar

5-21

5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up throughthe opening in the airbox.

6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.See Normal Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-14 for the correct part number forthe filter.

7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when youare driving.

Automatic Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealershipservice department and have it repaired as soon aspossible. You may also have your fluid level checked byyour dealer when you have your oil changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery service.

5-22

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.

Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeledother than DEXRON ®-III, Approved for theH-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered by your warranty.Always use automatic transmission fluid labeledDEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see Engine Overheating onpage 5-26.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-23

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you donot need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than once or twice ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

5-24

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located onthe driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of theengine compartment. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. Never turn the surge tank pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULLCOLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the sideto the horizontal mark.

If the Check Coolant Level message in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on and stays on, itmeans you are low on engine coolant. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-74 for moreinformation.

5-25

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the surge tank pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible engine damagemay occur. Be sure the cap is properly andtightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere are three engine hot messages that may bedisplayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74 formore information.

5-26

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 5-28 for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-28 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning, along with a Check Coolant Levelmessage, can indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning with no CheckCoolant Level message, but see or hear no steam, theproblem may not be too serious. Sometimes theengine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

5-27

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat settingand fan speed and open the windows, as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you candrive normally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergency. Should an overheatedengine condition exist, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this mode, you will notice a lossin power and engine performance. A low coolant and/orengine overheat warning will indicate that an overheatcondition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/ortowing a trailer in the overheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.See Engine Oil on page 5-16.

5-28

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap

Some vehicles may be equipped with anengine driven fan, as well as the electricpusher fans (A) which are located behind thevehicle’s grille.

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar

5-29

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be ator slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on theside of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may havea leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drivethe vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the engine is overheating, both fans should berunning. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-28 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROIDline on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before you do it. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23 for more information.

5-30

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the coolantsurge tank pressure cap — even a little — theycan come out at high speed. Never turn thecap when the cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Waitfor the cooling system and coolant surge tankpressure cap to cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boil



before the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-31

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolantas follows:

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise (left) about one-quarter turn andthen stop.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on theside of the coolant surge tank.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. The upper radiatorhose is the largest of the hoses which comes out ofthe radiator, on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROIDline on the side of the coolant surge tank.

5-32

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CheckCoolant Level message does not appear on theDriver Information Center, the coolant is at the proper filllevel. If a Check Coolant Level message does appear,repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure cap,or see your GM dealer.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is located in thecenter of the enginecompartment, toward thefront of the vehicle.See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12for more informationon location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-33

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidThe Check Washer Fluid message will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid levelis low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other parts ofthe washer system. Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for expansion iffreezing occurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-34

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12for reservoir locationand access.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low, theCHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-74.

5-35

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake system parts sobadly that they will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-82.

5-36

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving, except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

5-37

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved replacement parts. If you do not,your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that arewrong for your vehicle, the balance between your frontand rear brakes can change — for the worse. Thebraking performance you have come to expectcan change in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. Werecommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for batterylocation and access.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-39 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-110.

5-38

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

5-39

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle,as well as the positive (+) terminal location onyour vehicle’s battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on thelocation of the battery.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) groundlocation, as shown in the illustration. It is locatedbetween the battery and the underhood fuse block.You should always use this remote groundlocation, instead of the terminal on the battery.

5-40

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.



Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5-41

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

5-42

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle hasone. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) groundlocation is for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in thewrong order, electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Remove the jumpercables in the correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) TerminalC. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

5-43

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

All-Wheel DriveAll of the lubricant checks in this section apply to yourvehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, thereis an additional system that need lubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the transfer casefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Drain PlugB. Fill Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the transfer case, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not toovertighten the plug.

5-44

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-12.

Rear AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.



If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.


5-45

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.


A. Drain PlugB. Filler Plug


If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the front axle, you may need to addsome lubricant.


5-46

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-49.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The low beam high intensity discharge lightingsystem operates at a very high voltage. If youtry to service any of the system components,you could be seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technician service them.

Your vehicle may have HID headlamps and fog lamps.After your vehicle’s HID headlamp or fog lamp bulbhas been replaced, you may notice that the beam is aslightly different shade than it was originally. Thisis normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the instructions on thebulb package.

5-47

Front Turn Signal LampsA. Turn Signal LampB. Fog Lamp

If the fog lamp needs to be replaced, see your dealer.

To replace a turn signal lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Remove the protection shield located on theunderside of the front of the vehicle by pullingout the push-pins located on the underside of theprotection shield.

2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from underthe vehicle to access the lamp housing.

3. Remove the bulb access cover by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb socket from the housing byturning the bulb socket one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping thebulb straight as you pull it out.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.

Sidemarker Lamps1. Locate the rear sidemarker lamp assembly under

the rear fascia.2. Turn the socket

counterclockwise andthen pull it straightout from thesidemarker lampassembly.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall thenew bulb.

4. Reverse Step 2 to reinstall the socket.

5-48

Back-Up Lamps1. Open the trunk.

2. Pull out the push pins holding down the top portionof the cloth cover.

3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate thelamp assembly.

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it straightout to remove it from the lamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall thenew bulb.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamps Bulb Number

Back-up 3157K

Front Turn Signal 3757KA

Rear Sidemarker W3W

For replacement bulbs not listed here, consultyour dealer.

5-49

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper bladeassembly on a regular basis or when worn. For properwindshield wiper blade length and type, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14.

To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to OFF/ACC, with the engine off.

2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them offagain when the wipers are in the out-wipeposition. The driver’s side blade will be straight upand down on the windshield.

3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away fromthe windshield.

4. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper bladeassembly and slide the assembly off the end of thewiper arm.

5-50

Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.

5. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.

6. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-31.

• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,punctured or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58,for inflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

5-51

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roadsoften, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.All season tires provide good overall performance onmost surfaces but they may not offer the tractionyou would like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads.

See your dealer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, see BuyingNew Tires on page 5-65

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on allfour wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,and speed rating as the original equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as your originalequipment tires may not be available for H, V, Wand ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires witha lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximumspeed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabellingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typical passengervehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-52

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,height, aspect ratio, construction type and servicedescription. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters andnumbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only one sidemay have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear, traction andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-67.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load.

5-53

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a tread life of approximately3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be drivenat speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a regular road tirehas lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-82and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-71.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number ofplies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).For more information on tire pressure and inflation seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbersdefine a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, constructiontype and service description. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire size means the tire is fortemporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPCspecifications meet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-54

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P asthe first character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates thetire height-to-width measurements. For example, ifthe tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C ofthe illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letterR means radial ply construction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These characters representthe load range and speed rating of the tire. The loadindex represents the load carry capacity a tire is certifiedto carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. Thespeed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

5-55

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure ina tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code includes the TireIdentification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tire manufacturer, productionplant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-31.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-56

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bears white lettering orbears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper than the same moldings onthe other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

5-57

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):A tire information system that provides consumerswith ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturersusing government testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-67.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plusthe rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-31.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-58

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to thevehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.This label lists your vehicle’s original equipmenttires and shows the correct inflation pressures for yourtires when they are cold. The recommended coldtire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and an example of the tireand loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ride comfort, never load yourvehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do not forgetto check the compact spare tire, it should be at60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regardingthe compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tireon page 5-82.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re under-inflated.Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires arecold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

5-59

High Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) orhigher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving, causesexcessive heat build up and can cause suddentire failure. You could have a crash and you orothers could be killed. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. When speed limits androad conditions are such, that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure the tires arerated for high speed operation, in excellentcondition and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for the vehicle load.

If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set thecold inflation pressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),whichever is lower. See the example following. Whenyou end this high-speed driving, return the tires to

the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-31.

Example:

You will find the maximum load and inflation pressuremolded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, nearthe rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximumload 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflation pressure forhigh-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted oneach tire and wheel assembly, except for the compactspare tire and wheel. Tire pressure readings are sent toa receiver located in the vehicle once every 60 secondswhile the vehicle is being driven, and once every60 minutes if the vehicle is stationary for more than15 minutes.

Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire pressurelevels may be viewed by the driver. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operation anddisplays see DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-69and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-74.

5-60

If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMsystem will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning message on the Driver Information Center (DIC)and, at the same time, illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol, on the instrument panel cluster.

When the tire pressuremonitoring system warninglight is lit, one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

You should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure asindicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability. Each tire, including the spare, should bechecked monthly when cold and set to therecommended inflation pressure as specified in thevehicle placard and owner’s manual.

The Tire and Loading Information Label (your vehicle’stire information placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the recommended cold

inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58. For the locationof the tire and loading information label, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-31.

Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-63 and Tires on page 5-51.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle isequipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

TPM Sensor Identification CodesEach TPM sensor has a unique identification code. Anytime you replace one or more of the TPM sensors,the identification codes will need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. Each tire/wheel position ismatched, to a sensor, by increasing or decreasing thetire’s air pressure. The sensors are matched, to thetire/wheel positions, in the following order: left front (LF),right front (RF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR).

You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheelposition, and five minutes overall, to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,to match the first tire and wheel, or more than fiveminutes to match all four tire/wheel positions thematching process stops and you will need to start over.

5-61

The TPM matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Press the push-button ignition switch to OFF/ACC.

3. Using the Keyless Access transmitter, lock andunlock the vehicle’s doors.

4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the sametime, on the Keyless Access transmitter. A singlehorn chirp will sound, indicating that the TPMsystem is ready, and the sensor matching processcan begin.

5. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.Activate the TPM sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that thesensor identification code has been matched tothis tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointy end of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage or a key.

7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming double horn chirp, forthe left rear tire, exit the matching process byturning the ignition switch to OFF/ACC.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire and loadinginformation label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If youreplace one of the road tires with the spare, theSERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayedon the DIC screen. This message should go offonce you re-install the road tire containing the TPMsensor. The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is alsodisplayed when the TPM system is malfunctioning.One or more missing or inoperable TPM sensors willcause the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message tobe displayed. See your GM dealer for service.

5-62


1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.


1. This device may not cause interference.



Tire Inspection and RotationTire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle has thefollowing performance tire combinations:

• P235/50R17 95V size tires on the front wheels andP255/45R17 98V size tires on the rear wheels.

• P235/50R18 97W size tires on the front wheels andP255/45R18 99W size tires on the rear wheels.

Different tire sizes front to rear should not be rotated.Each tire and wheel should be used only in the positionit is in.

Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is equippedwith P235/50R17 95S size tires on all four wheelpositions or 255/45ZR18 99Y size tires on all fourwheel positions. These tires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km)

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires assoon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-65 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-68 for more information.

5-63

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

When rotating P235/50R17 95S ALS or 255/45ZR1899Y size tires, always use the correct rotation patternshown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in yourtire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system will need to have the sensors reset after a tirerotation, see Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 5-60.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-104.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-72.

5-64

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:• You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through the

tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged

deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Tire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-31, for an example of the labeland where it can be found on your vehicle.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had aTire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPCSpec number. That way your vehicle will continue to havetires that are designed to give proper endurance,handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride, tirepressure monitoring system performance and otherthings during normal service on your vehicle. If your tireshave an all-season tread design, the TPC number will befollowed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).

Whenever you replace your tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating and constructiontype (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as your originalequipment tires may not be available for H, V, Wand ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires witha lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximumspeed capability.

5-65

If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not havinga TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning.Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low-pressure warningthat is higher or lower than the proper warning level youwould get with TPC Spec numbered tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizes(other than those originally installed on yourvehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes (other than those originally installed onyour vehicle) may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the correct size andtype tires on all wheels. It is all right to drivewith your compact spare temporarily, it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 5-82.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Vehicles equipped with performance tiresP235/50R17 95V (front axle) and P255/45R17 98V (rearaxle) are mounted on wheels with different rim widths.The front axle tires are mounted on rims 7.5 inches(19.05 cm) wide and the rear axle tires require wheelswith a minimum rim width of 8 inches (20.32 cm).The original equipment wheels designed forP255/45R17 98V size tires are etched with the wordsREAR ONLY. When replacing P255/45R17 98Vsize tires have them mounted on wheels with a minimumwidth of 8 inches (20.32 cm) and marked REARONLY. See Wheel Replacement on page 5-68.

5-66

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-67

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels may need to berebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

5-68

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

5-69

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P255/45R17 98V, P255/45R18 99W or 255/45ZR18 99Y size tires, do notuse tire chains, there is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without the properamount of clearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. Thearea damaged by the tire chains could causeyou to lose control of your vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, and donot spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit, installthem on the rear tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 95S sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and only whenyou must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Install themon the rear tires and tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

5-70

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-71

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire, on theother side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

5-72

When you have a flat tire, use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.

To gain access to the spare tire and jacking equipment,do the following:

1. Remove the compact spare tire cover.

2. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.

5-73

3. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 5-82 for more informationabout the compact spare tire.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and thewheel wrench (B).

5-74

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If your vehicle has wheel covers, use the flat end of thewheel wrench to remove the covers. Turn the wheelwrench clockwise to gently pry off the wheel cover.

Be careful not to scratch the aluminum wheel edge anddon’t try to remove the wheel cover with your hands.

If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, turn the wheelwrench counterclockwise to remove the caps.

Once the wheel cover and wheel nut caps have beenremoved, use the following steps to remove the flat tireand install the spare tire.

5-75

1. Place the wheel wrench (A) securely over the wheelnut (B). Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise toloosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet.

2. Find the jacking location using the diagram aboveand corresponding hoisting notches located in theplastic molding. The notches in the plastic moldingare marked with a triangle shape to help youfind them.

5-76

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never get undera vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower thejack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.

5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into themetal flange located behind the triangle on theplastic molding as shown.

6. Put the compact spare tire near you.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground for the compact spare tire to fit under thevehicle.

5-77

8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

9. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-78

10. Place the compactspare tire on thewheel-mountingsurface.

11. Put the wheel nutsback on with therounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise withyour hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-79

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-104 for wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-104 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compactspare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compactspare, you could damage the cover or the spare.

Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunkuntil you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

5-80

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,you’ll need to do the following to store the flat tire inyour trunk.

1. Store the jack and wheel wrench in theircompartment in the trunk.When storing the jack, in the container, it must beraised until the screw end is flush with the edgeof the jack.

2. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunkas possible.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soonas you can.

Use the following diagram as a guide for storing thecompact spare tire in the trunk:

A. Compact Spare TireCover

B. Plastic Wing NutC. RetainerD. Jack Container with

Wheel Wrenchand Jack

E. Compact Spare TireF. Foam InsertG. BoltH. Wheel WrenchI. JackJ. Jack Container

5-81

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and make sure yourspare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare ismade to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired orreplaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Yourspare will last longer and be in good shape in case youneed it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, donot take your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can getcaught on the rails. That can damage the tire andwheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not use tire chains onyour compact spare.

Appearance CareCleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a matchis struck near them or if they get on a hot part of thevehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaledin a closed space. When anything from a containeris used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow themanufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always openthe doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaningthe inside.

5-82

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless thismanual says you can. In many uses, these will damagethe vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loosedirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaceswith a clean, damp cloth.

GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to aclean area often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.To clean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. Forsolids: remove as much as possible and thenvacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabrictoo wet.

5-83

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to

make sure the cleaner does not affect the color ofthe fabric.

2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. Forsolids: remove as much as possible and thenvacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a cleansoft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly tothe fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the clotheach time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned areawith another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up withthe club soda water instructions given earlier inthis section.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, andblood can be removed using the club soda waterinstructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingersafter cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterand baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of bakingsoda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with anapproved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.This may have to be done more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain ifthey are not removed quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

5-84

LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Instrument PanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Wood PanelsUse a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (usemild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediatelywith a clean cloth.

Speaker CoversVacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that thespeaker will not be damaged. Clean spots withjust water and mild soap.

Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger and the integrated radio antenna. Whencleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

5-85

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth ofcolor, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. GM-approvedcleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-86.

5-86

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 5-90.

The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. Theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. To help keep the paintfinish looking new, keep the vehicle in a garage orcovered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap, or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution. Thewindshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsedwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-87

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsThe vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

5-88

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your GM dealer. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your GMdealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-89

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery, andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12.

5-90

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is veryhelpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

5-91

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicleunless you check with your dealer first. Someelectrical equipment can damage your vehicle andthe damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.Some add-on electrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring has an individual fuse. An electricaloverload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. If this happens, have the headlampwiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by an internalcircuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

5-92

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and powerseats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealerfor service immediately.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without – like the radio orcigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

The fuses are located in three fuse blocks. One islocated in the engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle, and the other two are locatedunder the rear seat on both the driver’s and passenger’sside of the vehicle.

5-93

Underhood Fuse Blockeb

5-94

The underhood fuse block is located in the front of theengine compartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location, and removalprocedure for the front compartment underhood sightsshields.

To access the fuses, push in the tabs located on eachside of the fuse block cover. Then, lift the cover off.

Fuses UsageBLOWER Blower MotorR REAR Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block

I/P OUTLET Front Auxiliary OutletCCP Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling

PRE 02/CAM Oxygen Sensor, CAM PhasersENG W/H Engine W/HR REAR Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse BlockWPR SW Wiper/Washer Switch

BODY W/H Body W/HFOG LAMP Fog Lamps

OUTLET Rear Auxiliary Outlet

EVEN COILS Even Ignition Coils, Even FuelInjectors

L REAR Left Rear Fuse BlockWPR MOD Wiper Module

Fuses UsagePOST 02 Oxygen Sensor

COMP CLTCH Air Conditioner Compressor ClutchSTARTER Starter Solenoid

ABS Anti-Lock Brake PumpL REAR Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block

BODY W/H Body W/H

RAIN SSR Rain Sensor, Headlamp Washer,Tire Pressure Monitor

CCP Climate ControlSMT BM-OPT Smart Beam Relay (Option)

EXT LIGHTS Low Beam Relay, High Beam Relay,Park Lamp Relay

VOLT CHECK Instrument Panel Module

ECM/TCM

Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module, EasyKey Module, Instrument PanelCluster

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

LT PARK Left Park Lamp, Left Taillamp

LIC DIMMING License Plate, Instrument PanelDimming

5-95

Fuses Usage

IPM ALDL Instrument Panel Module AssemblyLine Data Link Connector

HUD Heads-Up Display, Column LockModule

V8 ECM V8 ECM, Evap SolenoidABS Anti-Lock Brake Controller

STR RLY Starter RelayWASH

NOZ/AQSHeated Washer Nozzles, Air QualitySensor™

ODD COILS Odd Ignition Coils, Odd FuelInjectors

TCM IPC Transmission, Instrument Panel,Engine Control

SPARE SpareMAF Mass Air Flow Sensor

HIGH FAN Cooling Fan - High SpeedLOW FAN Cooling Fan - Low SpeedRT PARK Right Park Lamp, Right Taillamp

HORN HornLT HI BEAM Left Headlamp High Beam

LT LOW BEAM Left Headlamp Low Beam

Fuses UsageRT LOW BEAM Right Headlamp Low Beam

RT HI BEAM Right Headlamp High Beam

HFV6 ECM High Feature V6 Engine ControlModule

Relays UsageHDLP WASH

RELAYJUMPER -OPT

Headlamp Washer

STARTERRELAY MINI Starter

SPARE SpareFOG LAMP

RELAY MICRO Fog Lamps

CMP CLURELAY MICRO A/C Compressor Clutch

BLOWERRELAY MINI Front Blower Motor

POWERTRAINRELAY MICRO Engine Controls

RUN/CRANKRELAY MICRO Ignition 1

5-96

Relays UsageLOW

SPEED FANRELAY MINI

Cooling Fan Low Speed

ACCESSORYRELAY MINI Ignition 3

PARK LAMPRELAY MICRO Parking Lamps

HIGH BEAMRELAY MICRO High Beams

LOW BEAMRELAY/HIDMINI-OPT

Low Beam/HID

HIGHSPEED FANRELAY MINI

Cooling Fan High Speed

S/P FANRELAY MINI Cooling Fan Series/Parallel

HORN RELAYMICRO Horn

SPARE Spare

CircuitBreakers

Usage

HDLP WASHC/B - OPT Headlamp Washer (Option)

Rear Underseat Fuse Block

Removing the Rear Seat Cushion

Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with themetal on the seat cushion, you could cause a shortthat could damage the battery and or wires. Avoidcontact between the rear seat and the fusecenter whenever you remove or reinstall the rearseat. Do not remove covers from any of the coveredparts, and do not store anything under the seats.

To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:

1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release thefront hooks.

2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front ofthe vehicle.

5-97

To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly routedthrough the seat cushion or is twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash. If thesafety belt has not been routed through theseat cushion at all, it will not be there to workfor the next passenger. The person sitting inthat position could be badly injured. Afterreinstalling the seat cushion, always check tobe sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and are not twisted.

1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,then route the safety belts through the proper slotsin the seat cushion. Do not let the safety beltsget twisted.

5-98

2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under theseatback so the rear-locating guides hook intothe wire loops on the back frame.

3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward andthen press down on the seat cushion until thespring locks on both ends engage.

4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properlyrouted and that no portion of any safety belt istrapped under the seat. Also make sure the seatcushion is secured.

Rear Underseat Fuse Block

There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on thedriver’s side and passenger’s side of the vehicle. Therear seat cushion must be removed to access thefuse blocks. See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion”listed previously in this section.

To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then lift thecover off.

Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.

5-99

Driver’s Side

Fuses UsageSpare SpareAMP Amplifier


THEFT/SHIFTER Theft Sensors, Auto ShifterMR-RTD

MOD (OPT)MR-CVRTD Suspension Module(Option)

REAR DR MOD Rear Door ModulesELC

SOL (OPT) Exhaust Solenoid

Fuses UsageDRIVER DR

MOD Driver Door Module

TV/VICS Infotainment (Export Only)REAR HTD

SEATS Rear Heated Seats


IGN3 Front Passenger Heated Seat, AutoShifter, Occupant Protection

5-100

Fuses UsageRR SHLFSPEAKER Rear Shelf Speaker

DPM Memory Seat, LumbarTRUNK DR

VALET Trunk Release, Valet

REVERSELAMP

Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,Inside Rearview Mirror

AIR BAG AirbagPOSITION

LAMPS (OPT) Rear Taillamps

JOINTCONNECTOR Joint Connector

Relays UsageELC

RELAY (OPT) ELC Compressor (Option)

L POSITIONRELAY MICRO

Left Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps(Option)

Relays UsageTRUNK DRREL RELAY

MICROTrunk Release Motor

REV LAMPRELAY MICRO Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid

R POSITIONRELAY MICRO

Right Rear Taillamp, Position Lamps(Option)

RUN RELAYMICRO Ignition 3

STNDBY LAMPRLY (OPT)

Rear Taillamps, Position Lamps(Option)

CircuitBreakers

Usage

SEATS C/B Power Seat

5-101

Passenger’s Side

Fuses UsageSPARE Spare

TRUNK DIODE Trunk DiodeCANISTER

VENT Canister Vent Solenoid

RT TURN-RIM Right Turn SignalSUNROOF

(OPT) Sunroof Module (Option)

STOP LAMPS StoplampsFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

RF HTDST/S-BAND

Front Passenger Heated Seat,S-Band Antenna

Fuses UsageRADIO/ONSTAR Radio/OnStar®

AIR BAG AirbagsRIM Battery to RIM

RUN/CRANK Ignition 1HTD STG/CLM Heated Steering WheelREAR DEFOG Rear Defogger

INTERIORLAMP Interior Lamps

PSG DR MOD Front Passenger Door ModuleLT TURN-RIM Left Turn Signal

5-102

Fuses UsageREAR FOGLAMP (OPT) Rear Fog Lamps (Option)

AFTERBOIL(OPT) After Boil Pump

RIM Ignition to RIMJOINT

CONNECTOR Joint Connector

Relays UsageSPARE Spare

REAR DEFOGRELAY MINI Rear Defog

FUEL PUMPRELAY MICRO Fuel Pump

REAR FOGLAMP RLY

MICRO (OPT)Rear Fog Lamps (Option)

Relays UsageSTOP LAMP

RELAY MICRO Stoplamps

INT LAMPRELAY MICRO Interior Lamps

RUN/CRANKRELAY MICRO Ignition 1

AFTERBOILRELAY MICRO

(OPT)After Boil Pump (Option)

CircuitBreakers

Usage

WINDOWMTRS C/B

Power Window Motors CircuitBreaker

5-103

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 2.2 lbs 1.0 kg

Cooling System 13.0 quarts 12.3 L

Engine Oil with Filter3.6L V64.6L V8

6.0 quarts8.0 quarts

5.7 L7.6 L

Fuel Tank 17.5 gallons 66.3 L

Transmission 15.0 quarts 14.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L HFV6 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.1 mm)

4.6L DOHC V8 A Automatic 0.040 inches (1.0 mm)

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-15

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessaryto keep your vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance may not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not know exactlyhow you will drive it. You may drive very short distancesonly a few times a week. Or you may drive long distancesall the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have the requiredknow-how and the proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have your GMGoodwrench dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for yourservice needs, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

If you want to get service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it and whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,make sure these are used. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it meansthat service is required for your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicianswho will perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that your first service be Maintenance I,your second service be Maintenance II and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchased orMaintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message comes on10 months or more since the last service or if themessage has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †. • •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-51. • •Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Service and Miles (Kilometers)25,000

(41 500)50,000

(83 000)75,000

(125 000)100,000

(166 000)125,000

(207 500)150,000

(240 000)Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for looseor damaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-21. An EmissionControl Service.

• • • • • •

For all-wheel-drive vehicles used fortrailer towing: Change transfer case fluid. • • •

Throttle body service. An EmissionControl Service. See footnotes † and (l). • • • • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or every5 years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. •

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urgethat all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parkingbrake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damagedor that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety beltsreplaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the hood, rearcompartment, glove box door and console door. Morefrequent lubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

6-7

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as limousine service.− Uses such as high performance operation.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not require change.

(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace parts asneeded. Replace any components that have high effortor excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator orcruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates fordeposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect allsurfaces. Clean as required.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist youwith these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

6-8

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep yourengine oil at the proper level can cause damageto your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflatedto the correct pressures. Do not forget to check yourspare tire. See Tires on page 5-51 for further details.Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If it moves,tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72.

6-9

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-30if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked ona level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-30 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off and without applying the regularbrake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)with normal effort. If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealerfor service.

6-10

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).Then release the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if serviceis required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires a special engineoil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.Oils meeting this standard may beidentified as synthetic, and shouldalso be identified with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbol.However, not all synthetic API oilswith the starburst symbol will meetthis GM standard. You should lookfor and use only oil that meets GMStandard GM4718M. GMGoodwrench oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. For theproper viscosity, see Engine Oil onpage 5-16.


Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use onlyDEX-COOL® Coolant. See EngineCoolant on page 5-23.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

6-12


Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Front Axle(All-Wheel

Drive)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Transfer Case(All-Wheel

Drive)

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid. Look for“Approved for the H-Specification”on the label.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchorand Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

6-13

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element 25099149 A1208C

Engine Oil Filter3.6L V64.6L V8

2517791789017342

PF2129PF61

Fuel Filter Element 25121293 GF-627

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 25762030 —

Spark Plugs3.6L V64.6L V8

1256599612571533

41–98841–986

Windshield Wiper Blade (Structureless)Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.0 cm)

8895818088958182

——

6-14

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading Serviced By

Maintenance I orMaintenance II Services Performed

6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-16




6-17




6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5Roadside Service ...........................................7-6Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ..................................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-11Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors .........................................7-11Service Publications

Ordering Information ..................................7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1

Customer Assistanceand Information

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hoursa day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contactGM of Canada, Canadian Cadillac CustomerCommunication Centre by calling 1-888-446–2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Cadillac, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer to yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet forinformation on the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesCadillac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes towrite to Cadillac, the letter should be addressedto Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States — Customer AssistanceCadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

7-4

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgramThis program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptive equipment you mayrequire for your vehicle, such as hand controls andwheelchair/scooter lifts.

The offer is available for a limited period of time fromthe date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, orto determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside ServiceCadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than anauto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillacowner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-site service.

Each technician travels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillacparts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.This service is provided at no charge for anywarranty-covered situation and for a nominal chargeif the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. RoadsideService is available only in the United Statesand Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™Roadside Service provides several Cadillac OwnerPrivileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your CadillacWarranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles(80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site for thefollowing situations:

• Towing Service

• Battery Jump Starting

• Lock Out Assistance

• Fuel Delivery

• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due toa warranty failure, incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles(80 000 km) warranty period. Items coveredare hotel, meals, and rental car.

Roadside Service AvailabilityWherever you drive in the United States or Canada, anadvisor is available to assist you over the phone. Adealer technician, if available, can travel to your locationwithin a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participatingCadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we willarrange to have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership.

7-6

Reaching Roadside ServiceDial the toll-free Roadside Service number:1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assistyou and request the following information:

• A description of the problem

• Name, home address, home telephone number

• Location of your Cadillac and number you arecalling from

• The model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery

Roadside Service for the Hearing orSpeech ImpairedRoadside Service is prepared to assist owners whohave hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillachas installed special telecommunication devicescalled Text Telephone (TTY) in the RoadsideService Center.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or aconventional teletypewriter can communicate withCadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.

Courtesy TransportationCadillac has always exemplified quality and value in itsoffering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participating dealers areproud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, you shouldcontact your dealer and request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

7-7

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillachelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes aone way or round trip shuttle service to a destinationup to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement (five days maximum) may be availablefor the use of public transportation such as taxi orbus. In addition, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may beavailable. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs andbe supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicleyou obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 aday and must be supported by receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete a rental agreement and meetstate, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Youare responsible for fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessivemileage, or rental usage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

7-8

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has anumber of sophisticated computer systems that monitorand control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle

computers to monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bagdeployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lockbraking and to help the driver control the vehiclein difficult driving situations. Some information may bestored during regular operations to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions; other information is stored onlyin a crash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called event data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as the AirBag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in yourvehicle may record information about the condition ofthe vehicle and how it was operated, such as datarelated to engine speed, brake application, throttleposition, vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bagreadiness, air bag performance, and the severity of acollision. If your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak®,steering performance, including yaw rate, steering wheelangle, and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. Thisinformation has been used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improve crashperformance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlikethe data recorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such as conversation ofvehicle occupants.

7-9

To read this information, special equipment is neededand access to the vehicle or the device that storesthe data is required. GM will not access informationabout a crash event or share it with others other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the

vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,• in response to an official request of police or similar

government office,• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the

discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:• use the data for GM research needs,• make it available for research where appropriate

confidentiality is to be maintained and need isshown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a specificvehicle with non-GM organizations forresearch purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access tothe special equipment that can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please checkthe OnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you will notifyus. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, please call us at 1–888–446–2000.Or, write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

7-11

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-46Adaptive Cruise Control ................................... 3-19Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-92Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-47Airbag

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-59Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9Airbag System ................................................ 1-45

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-53Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-56What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-53What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-54When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-51Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-47

All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-44All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ......................... 2-29Antenna, Diversity Antenna System .................. 3-114Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ........................................ 3-114Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-61Appearance Care ............................................ 5-82

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-88Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-86

Appearance Care (cont.)Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-89Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-86Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-83Finish Care ................................................. 5-87Finish Damage ............................................ 5-89Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-85Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-85Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-85Leather ...................................................... 5-85Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-89Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-85Tires .......................................................... 5-88Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-90Vinyl .......................................................... 5-84Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-86Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-87Wood Panels .............................................. 5-85

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-46Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-87

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-111Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-113Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-113Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-114Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-106

1

Audio SystemsRadio Personalization ................................. 3-107

Audio System(s)Radio with CD ............................................ 3-88Setting the Time .......................................... 3-87Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-110Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-112XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-114

Automatic TransmissionFluid .......................................................... 5-22Operation ................................................... 2-26

BBattery .......................................................... 5-38

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-38Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-40Load Management ....................................... 3-40

Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6Emergencies ................................................ 4-8Panic Assist ................................................ 4-10Parking ...................................................... 2-30System Warning Light .................................. 3-60

Brakes .......................................................... 5-35Braking ........................................................... 4-5Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-23

Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-49Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-48Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-47Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-49Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-48

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-65

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-104Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-33, 4-26, 4-38Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-86Your CD Player ......................................... 3-113Your CDs ................................................. 3-113

Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-45Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-70Charging System Light .................................... 3-60Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-64Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-89Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-32Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-29

2

Child Restraints (cont.)Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-38Older Children ............................................. 1-26Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ................................... 1-40Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-40Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................... 1-42Top Strap ................................................... 1-36Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-37Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-35

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-46Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-88Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-86Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-83Finish Care ................................................. 5-87Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-85Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-85Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-85Leather ...................................................... 5-85Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-85Tires .......................................................... 5-88Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-89Vinyl .......................................................... 5-84Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-86

Cleaning (cont.)Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-86Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-87Wood Panels .............................................. 5-85

Climate Control SystemAir Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-54Dual .......................................................... 3-47Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-52Rear .......................................................... 3-53

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-23Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-82Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convenience Net ............................................ 2-45Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-63Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-63Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-25Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26

Cooling System .............................................. 5-29Cruise Control, Adaptive .................................. 3-19Cruise Control, Forward Collision Alert (FAC)

System ........................................................ 3-9Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-16Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-68Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-45Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4

3

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-11Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-10Roadside Service .......................................... 7-6Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-35Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-114Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Locks ........................................................ 2-11Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-13

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-69DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-69DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-74Other Messages .......................................... 3-86

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-16City ........................................................... 4-20Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-21Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-31Winter ........................................................ 4-26

Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-47

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-92Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-92Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-93Rear Underseat Fuse Block .......................... 5-97Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-94Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-92

4

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21Battery ....................................................... 5-38Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-64Coolant ...................................................... 5-23Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-63Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-63Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33Oil ............................................................. 5-16Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-28Overheating ................................................ 5-26Starting ...................................................... 2-24

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-39Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-25Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-38

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21Finish Damage ............................................... 5-89Flash-to-Pass ................................................. 3-13Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-71Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-72Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-81

FluidAutomatic Transmission ................................ 5-22Power Steering ........................................... 5-33Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-34

Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-67Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-37Forward Collision Alert (FAC) System .................. 3-9Front Axle ...................................................... 5-46Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-68Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-93Rear Underseat Fuse Block .......................... 5-97Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-94Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-92

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-63Fuel .......................................................... 3-68

5

Gage (cont.)Speedometer .............................................. 3-58Tachometer ................................................. 3-58

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-41Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-45GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-92Headlamps .................................................... 3-31

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-35Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 3-13Front Turn Signal Lamps .............................. 5-48Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-47High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9On Reminder .............................................. 3-35Sidemarker Lamps ....................................... 5-48Washer ...................................................... 3-16Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-35

Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-41Heated Seats ............................................ 1-3, 1-4

Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7Heater ........................................................... 3-47Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-68Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-41HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-42Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-13

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-23Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-40Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-58Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-39Cluster ....................................................... 3-57Overview ..................................................... 3-4

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-39

6

KKeyless Access System ..................................... 2-3Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLabelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-52Lamps

Battery Load Management ............................ 3-40Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-38Fog ........................................................... 3-37Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .................... 3-40Reading ..................................................... 3-40Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 3-37

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ........................................... 1-38Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ................................... 1-40Light

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-59Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-61Brake System Warning ................................. 3-60Charging System ......................................... 3-60Cruise Control ............................................. 3-68

Light (cont.)Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-63Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-67Highbeam On ............................................. 3-68Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-67Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ................... 3-62Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-64Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-66Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-58Security ..................................................... 3-67TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-62Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-62

LightingEntry ......................................................... 3-39Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-39

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-9Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13Locks

Door .......................................................... 2-11Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13Power Door ................................................ 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

7

MMagnetic Ride Control ....................................... 4-9Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using Your ................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-64Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-64Memory Seat ................................................. 2-64Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-64Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-74Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-35Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®

and Compass .......................................... 2-35

Mirrors (cont.)Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature .............................................. 1-7Memory ..................................................... 2-64Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-38Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-38Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror ................. 2-39Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-37

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNavigation/Radio System ................................ 3-106New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-23Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-58Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-16Pressure Light ............................................. 3-66

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-26Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® System ............................................. 2-39

8

Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-52Outside

Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-38Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-38Parallel Park Assist Mirror ............................. 2-39Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-37

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode .......................................... 5-28

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPanic Brake Assist .......................................... 4-10Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-39Park Aid ........................................................ 3-44Park (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-31Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32

ParkingAssist ........................................................ 3-44Brake ........................................................ 2-30Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-33

Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-54Passing ......................................................... 4-13

PowerAccessory Outlets ........................................ 3-46Door Locks ................................................. 2-11Electrical System ......................................... 5-93Inadvertent Battery Saver ............................. 3-40Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3Reclining Seatback ........................................ 1-5Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-24Seat ............................................................ 1-2Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-33Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-6Windows .................................................... 2-17

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-25Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-42

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-12

RRadios .......................................................... 3-87

Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-113Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-113Navigation/Radio System ............................. 3-106

9

Radios (cont.)Radio Personalization ................................. 3-107Radio with CD ............................................ 3-88Setting the Time .......................................... 3-87Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-110Understanding Reception ............................ 3-112

Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-14Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-40Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-45

Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-9Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-53Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-6Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-23Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-20Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® .............................................. 2-35Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass .......................... 2-35Rearview Mirror with Compass and

Temperature ................................................. 1-7Reclining Seatback, Power ................................. 1-5Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-36Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ............................................. 5-75Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-73Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-49

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government .................................. 7-11General Motors ........................................... 7-11United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System CheckChecking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-56Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ..................................................... 1-57Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-56Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-57

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-24Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-20Roadside

Service ........................................................ 7-6Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-31Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners .............................................. 1-25Reminder Light ............................................ 3-58

Safety BeltsCare of ...................................................... 5-86Driver Position ............................................ 1-13How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-13Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-12

10

Safety Belts (cont.)Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-23Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-20Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-20Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-25Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-20Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-7Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-19

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6Heated and Ventilated Seats ........................... 1-4Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3Heated Seats, Rear ....................................... 1-6Memory ..................................................... 2-64Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3Power Reclining Seatback .............................. 1-5Power Seats ................................................. 1-2

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System ................... 1-40Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-40Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-42

Security Light ................................................. 3-67Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour Vehicle .............................................. 5-5

Service (cont.)Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-64Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-56Setting the Time ............................................. 3-87Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-89Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-31Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-19Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Spare Tire

Installing .................................................... 5-75Removing ................................................... 5-73Storing ....................................................... 5-81

Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-104Speedometer .................................................. 3-58Stabilitrak® System ......................................... 4-10Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-24Steering ........................................................ 4-11Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-111Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-64Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ............................ 3-6Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-45Convenience Net ......................................... 2-45

11

Storage Areas (cont.)Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-45Glove Box .................................................. 2-45

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-19Sunroof ......................................................... 2-46

TTachometer .................................................... 3-58TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-62Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-110Theft-Deterrent System .................................... 2-20Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-20Tires ............................................................. 5-51

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ................................................. 5-88

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-65Chains ....................................................... 5-70Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-72Cleaning .................................................... 5-88Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-82If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-71Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-58Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-63

Tires (cont.)Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-75Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-60Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-75Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-73Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-81Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-52Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-56Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-67Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-68Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-68When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-65

Top Strap ...................................................... 1-36Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-37Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-36Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-36

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-8Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-62Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-9Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 4-9Stabilitrak® System ...................................... 4-10

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26

12

Trunk ............................................................ 2-13Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-37

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-44Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-112Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-67

VValet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-22Vehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivSymbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders .................................................... 7-9

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-91Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-91

Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-47Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ...... 2-64

Ventilated Seats ............................................... 1-4Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-52Visors ........................................................... 2-19

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-56Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-74Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-68Replacement ............................................... 5-68

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-35Windows ....................................................... 2-16

Power ........................................................ 2-17Windshield

Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-87Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-15

Fluid .......................................................... 5-34

13

Windshield WiperBlade Replacement ...................................... 5-50Fuses ........................................................ 5-92Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-14Windshield Wipers ....................................... 3-13

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-35

XXM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-114

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

2005 cadillac sts owner manual m - vaden gmpp · 2005 cadillac sts owner manual m. general motors,...

Documents